ASIA
S\\ s^\'^ -"■wN
«^i.
11 I
a
M 1,
I f.? t|
■v.-SBS'-N-'-V-^^-*-
CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
Cornell University Library
PL4163.C32E3
An elementary hand-book of the Siamese I
3 1924 009 746 227
DATE DUE
■^"^
waww— "!'
4
-mm
MMPfr
"^"rraVO '
CAYLORO
^BINTCOIN U S.A.
SI|*iw»>'«l'W-'-
CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
AN
ELEMENTARY HAND-BOOK
OP THE
SIAMESE LANGUAGE
BY
BASIL OSBORN CARTWRIGHT, B. A.,
Exhibitioner of King's College, Cambridge.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
BANGKOK :
Pkixteo at ."The American Presbtteuian Mission Phess,
1906.
LUZAC (H Co..
LONDON.
Cornell University
Library
The original of tliis book is in
tine Cornell University Library.
There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.
http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924009746227
LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS TO THE
FIRST EDITION.
G. J. Adams
J. Addison
H. C. Andersen
J. Andre
N. E. Baasch
A. E. Baguley
M. C, Beaton
J. R. Bell
F. H. Bingham
J. Stewart Black
C. Bodenstab
Dr. Bohmer (2)
The Bombay Burmah Co.
H. W. Bourke
E. Brande
R. H. Brown
Oscar Browning M. A.
(Cambridge)
G. R. Brooks
E. Bryan
E. Bryant
J. Bruun
W. J. Burns
J. D. Byrne
M. Cacace
F. Campbell
A. C. Carter
Dr. M. Carthew
A. P. Carus
R. H. Chubb
H. W. Clarke
F. Clements
J. F. Cola50
H. Collingwood
Th. Collmann
Rev. E. Columbet
A. Willard Cooper
L. Day
F. Dean
A. J. Dickson
F. Didier
Dr. F. Dietzel
W. J. Doughty-Renong
W. Duncan
The East Asiatic Co.
0. Eckert
W. A. Elder
J. E. Ellam
N. R. Eltekoff
G. F. Weston-Elwes
F. Fairweather
Messrs. Falck & Beidek
P. Feit
P. Frege
J. P. Gandy
V. Gedde
A. Genkel
R. B. H. Gibbins
F. L. Gill (Miss)
Luang Gini
F. G. Gorton
R. Gosnell
Richard Gotte
H. G. Gough
IV.
List of Subscribers to the First Edition
A. W. Graham
Canon Greenstock (2)
W. Grossjohann
F. Hamacher
Dr. T. H. Hays (2)
E. W. Hedgeland
A. Heggie
S. H. Hendrick
W. H. Hill
W. H. Hinchley
H. Hooker
E. Hutchinson
Capt. N. Ivancich
W. F. Jacobsen
J. Caulfeild James (2)
A. Jensen
F. G. de Jesus
G. de Jesus
W. G. Johnson
T. Jones
Aage Jonsen
0. Jorgensen
Khaw Oo Soo
L. Killian
E. Kluzer
K. Kono (Miss)
J. van Langenburg
Eric. S. J. Lawson
M. D. O'Leary
G.Lee
H. S. Leonard
A. Lessler
J. W. Lindsay
A. ListermannfSingap're)
W. H. Lloyd
J. Macbeth
Dr. H. D. Mackenzie
D. McGlashen
A. Maire
M. Mannsfeldt
E. H. V. Mayne
W. Meyer
J. A. Minto
E. C. Monod
M. A. Morrison
W. Mundie
N. Nakashima (Miss)
M. N. Nathan
F. Neubronner (Penang)
A. P. Norman
H. Park
R. E. Payne
D. A. Pestonji
M. Pickenpack (Hamb'rg)
Nai Poh
Phra Nai Wai
Norman Prentice
Messrs. Probsthain & Co.,
London (5)
H. R H. Prince Rajani
H. E. Phya Narissa
Rajakitch (Tokio)
C. H. Ramsay
G. Kennedy Reid
J. S. Reese
C. Roberts
J. Robertson
C. Robyns
G. Rowland
F. Sampson
R. Schultz
H. Schv^^een
H. G. Scott
P. Scott
List of Subscribers to the First Edition
L. J. Sequeira
W. W. Shand
W. F. Smart (2)
H. E. Spivey
W. J. Steel
Dr. Ph. Stoenner
A. Storm
J. Strachan
W. G. Swan
J. H. Swanston
K. Tanabe
J. Tanaka iTokio)
L. B. Taylor
W. Taylor
H. Thomson
A. F. G. Tilleke
W. A. G. Tilleke
C. G. Timonelli
S. Tisseman
M. Topenot
E. W. Trotter
P. Trotter
E. N. Turner
L. Th. Unverzagt
T. M. Upton (3j
A. Van
V. Virgeen
L. Volaperta
J. Waldburger
H. E. Ware
C. B. West
J. I. Westengard
E. J. Wood
T. Yasui (Miss)
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
— — Page
Preface - - VIII
Books Recommended - - XI
Addenda - XII
Errata XIII
Introduction - - 1
Chapter I.— The Low Class Consonants - 3
Chapter II.-The Simple Vowels - 7
Chapter III.— The Middle Class Conson-
ants N. M. Ng 12
Chapter IV. — Compound Vowels and Diph-
thongs • - 17
Chapter V.— The Tones (Introduction) - 23
Chapter VI.— The High Class Consonants
Rising and Acute Tones - 26
Chapter VII.— Deep and Dropped Tones - 33
Chapter VIII. — Tones of Words ending in 37
K. P. T. and Short Vowels
Chapter IX.— Haw Num; Recapitulation 41
of Tones
Chapter X. — Double Initial Consonants, &c. 50
Chapter XL— Numerals - 57
Chapter XII.— The Simple Sentence (Intro-
ductory) - 60
Chapter XIII. -The Noun - - 66
Table of Contents vii.
Chapter XIV. -The Verb - 80
Chapter XV. -The Adjective 90
Chapter XVI. -The Pronouns - 96
Chapter XVII. -The Adverb - 104
Chapter XVIIL— Prepositions Conjunctions
Interjections - - HI
Chapter XIX.— Time Money Weights and
Measures - 116
Chapter XX.— Some Miscellaneous Siamese
Idioms 130
Chapter XXI. -Letter Writing 143
Chapter XXII. -The Court Language - 147
Chapter XXIIL— Some Points of Siamese
Orthography - - 152
Miscellaneous Exercises (44-70,) 170
Easy Passages for Translation into
English (71-89,) 197
Easy Passages for Translation into
Siamese (90-100,) - 214
Newspaper Cuttings (101-115,) - 222,
Siamese Letters (116-135,) 234
Harder Passages (Siamese) 135-150 with notes 252
Appendix A. - 282
Appendix B. - 309
English-Siamese Vocabulary 321
Siamese-English Vocabulary - 343
I
AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
N this book, an attempt has been made for the first
time, to set forth in English, a method of acquiring
a practical working knowledge of the Siamese
language. This method is one which the author has
found by practical experience to be one, which can be
succesfully followed by the majority of learners.
Hitherto those who have tried to acquire the lang-
uage from a native teacher, have laboured under two
great disadvantages, firstly that so very few Siamese
teachers have a suflficient knowledge of English to
enable them to make explanations in necessary detail,
and, secondly that they use a method, which although
suitable forteachingthe Siamese language to a Siamese
child, is one which is hard of comprehension by a
foreigner. The author trusts that this book will
remove these disadvantages by giving the rules and
explanations, and by indicating an applicable method.
The real work therefore of the Siamese teacher, is in
the earlier part of the book, to teach the learner the
correct pronunciation, and, in the latter- part, to help
him to translate English into good Siamese.
In the earlier exercises Nos. 26 to 38 for
translation into English, the Siamese is not very
idiomatic. This has been purposely arranged so as
not to give the learner too many difficulties to deal
with at first. It is useful for the learner to compare
these sentences with the same sentences rendered
into strictly idiomatic Siamese, in a small book
entitled " Exercises for Translation " by the same
author. Siamese is distinctly a difficult language
especially as regards the correct pronunciation, on
which the meanings of the majority of words so
vitally depends. A word of caution is therefore
necessary to would-be learners, and especially to those
Author's Preface ix,
who imagine they can " pick up" a smattering of the
language in a few weeks by trying to learn words or
sentences in a parrot like fashion from romanised
versions which are invariably most misleading. To
try to do this is merely absolute waste of time, money
and frequently of temper also.
The author has found by practical experience,
that a working knowledge of the language can be
acquired by average persons with proper tuition and
diligence on the part of the learner in about 6—8
months, and by those with linguistic abilities in a
somewhat shorter period.
It is a matter of regret that a few errata have
been allowed to pass uncorrected. The learner is
advised to make the corrections indicated on page xiii.
The author trusts in a subsequent edition
(should it be called for) that these defects will be
eliminated.
In conclusion the author begs to tender his best
thanks to those who have so kindly assisted in the
production of this work. His obligations are especially
due to H. E. Phya Visuddha, Vice-Minister of Public
Instruction. Pra Bhaisala, Dr. 0. Frankfurter, Ph. D.,
Mom Luang Yaam and Nai Boon Heng, for their
kindness in correcting proof sheets and giving many
valuable hints and suggestions.
He also begs to thank H. E. Phya Visuddha
and H. E Phya Sri Sahadheb, (Vice-Minister of the
Interior) for their kind permission to use certain
extracts from their books for translation exercises. To
the former for Exercises 144, 145 and 146 taken from
tiw fma nff uvummii-
X. Author's Preface
To the latter for Exercises 142, 143, and 148
taken from r.wt vn^ m^-s wjtr.TiRimu ds^iH iJsuviPi ?^ l5il-
Bangkok :
October, 1906.
Note to Siamese Teachers.
It must be distinctly remembered that many of
the combinations of characters used in the earlier
exercises (Exercises 2-25 inclusive) are merely sounds
and not words. The above exercises are for reading
only and hence have been constructed somewhat on
the lines of an ordinary English reading primer in
which sounds such as ab eb ib ob ub are employed at
first. Of course occasional words do occur here and
there, but the student is not supposed to learn the
meanings of any words until he reaches Chapter XI.
Abbreviations used in this Book.
F. S. R. = First Siamese Reading Book
Inuu ilyu in mii ej
D. P. = Designatory Particle.
C. F. = Compare.
N. = Noun.
V. = Verb.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR THE
STUDY OF SIAMESE.
Readers.
1. The First Siamese Reading Book [ mu
iIdu h im ViW ] sold everywhere in Bangkok 12th
Edition price 28 atts.
2. The First Siamese Reader [ uuu srou dnu
im ms ] price 16 atts.
3. vmm tljjj n m ii'^n ^r\ price 16 atts (for
very elementary reading. )
4. The Second Siamese Reading Book [ uuu
mv. in im ?!m ] for practice in orthography.
Books for Translation.
5. "The Ladder of Knowledge" series,
volume 3 (Morant) price 2^ ticals [ m \ inn m ]
for further practice in translating easy Englisin
passages into Siamese.
6. " The Journeys of the Siamese Ambas-
sadors to London and Paris" price 3 and 5
salungs each respectively published by S. J.Smith
Printing Office Bangkolem Bangkok for transla-
tion from Siamese into English (fairly easy).
'^- K4jt vnj m^-^ mt jTB miiu tlstsNiFf ilKiviR ytsiJ
price 6 ticals (more difficult) Published at Luang
Damrong's Printing office See kak Sow Ching
Cha Bangkok.
ADDENDA.
To page 72. . Uses of the Designatory Particles.
(i) With every numerical expression,
(ii) With such words as wsiy >fi) uu-
The Designatory particles are generally
omitted with.
(i) Material nouns.
(ii) Generic statements, e. g. He sells
knives.
(iii) Possessive adjectives and the phrases
mm 14 mki uu-
To page 135.
16. The Ccmparative without Hhan' is
expressed in Siamese by "tiu not n^i-
Example. You must write better.
But You must write better than this.
Tiiu ms nuii f\ mi ainj v.-
To page 160.
line 11. add. g^'^n'^^^^ February.
ERRATA.
The Student is advised to make the following
corrections in his book.
Page line
For
Read
16
Ex8B2
68
17
72
20
78
10
83
2
90
18
116
14
140
6
149
11
160
13
181
2
185
10
205
13
206
1
7J
8
212
10
222
8
224
10
225
10
226
5
229
11
243
4
252
10-12
253
4
261
10
264
7
268
10
particles
Engish
adjective
111 'fly
an
BUI
TIJilD
1
nil 1m
in
Ml
k
particle
m
English
adjectives
•Sn
QlJl
tiku
1
ui^
■mi
mi
If UT
li
k
n?)
'i'i
INTRODUCTION.
Tjt H E Siamese language belongs to the class
^ of ' Toned ' languages. It is devoid of all
grammatical inflections and, since the bulk of the
words are monosyllabic, ditt'erent ideas have to
be expressed by using- the same or similar com-
binations of characters. To differentiate these
combinations into words it often happens that a
given combination of characters has to be pro-
nounced in different tones of the voice. It is of
the greatest importance to the learner that he
should become familiar with these different
tones, as it is upon this point that it greatly
depends whether he makes himself understood
or not. There is no greater error than to sup-
pose that these tone differences are of slight
importance. They are the most vital point and
the whole rrt/.r of the Siamese language. It is
practically impossible to express adequately
these tone differences on paper. , Many have
tried to do so, but the resulting multiplicity of
arbitrary signs and accents has only made
'confusion worse confounded.'
The only way for the student to become
familiarised with the tones, is to hear them over
ano over again from a well educated Siamese,
and to be thoroughly acquainted with the rules
which govern the tones. Another point of
difficulty in representing Siamese words in
Eomanised form is that certain of the Siamese
( 2 )
vowels and consonants have no exact English
equivalents.
It is but sheer waste of time for the would-
be learner to try to "pick-up" words and
sentences from Romanised versions, for these
reasons. In the first place he will not be able
to acquire the correct pronunciation of any but
the simplest words, and secondly, his knowledge
of the language so acquired would be merely
empirical.
The great secret of learning to speak
Siamese correctly is this. Firstly, learn the
values of the different characters and become
familiarised with the tones, before trying to
make even the simplest sentence. Secondly,
always try to remember how a word is spelled,
as then it is easy to know its correct pronuncia-
tion. No living language can be properly learnt
from books alone, the assistance of a competent
teacher is a siiu^ qua non.
The Siamese language is by no means a
homogenous one. There are a great many
words of Chinese, Laos, and other words in-
corporated into the ordinary speech of the
people, while the bulk of the words used in
Higher or Court Siamese are derived or taken
directly from Pali and Sanskrit. A fair number
of these Pali and Sanskrit derivatives, are,
however used. in the ordinary language,
Besides these, there are a few European
words principally English, which have been
taken into the Siamese language.
( 3 )
The author has compiled this book with the
object of its being used together with the ser-
vices of an intelligent teacher.
The author, having had considerable ex-
Eerience in the teaching of Siamese to Europeans,
as come to the conclusion that it is quite impos-
sible to represent the sound of a Siamese word
by such a combination by letters which will be
intelligible to Europeans of different nationalities.
For example, an Englishman will represent
the sound of a given Siamese word by one com-
bination, a German, by another, a Dane by a
third and so forth. The author therefore has
not given any Romanised equivalents except in
the simple cases of the vowels and consonants.
In such cases the equivalents are to be pronounc-
ed according to standard English pronunciation
unless otherwise directed. If the learner cares
to do so, he can write down the sound of any
combination in his book by whatever combina-
tion of letters he may think best after being able
to reproduce the sound correctly.
The learner should procure a copy of the
First Siamese Reading Book [ iiuu tvM m ijslw si ] to
be used as directed in conjunction with this book.
Chapter I.
The first thing for the Student to do, is to
be able to recognise the more common of the
Siamese characters.
( 4 )
The Consonants.
In Siamese there are 44 consonants. They
are divided into 3 classes.
A. Low Class Consonants.
B. Middle Class Consonants.
C. High Class Consonants.
It is of great importance (for a reason to be
explained later i to remember to which of these
thre3 classes each consonant belongs. Some of
these 44 consonants are but rarely used in com-
parison with the others. It is therefore the
best plan not to attempt lo learn them all at
once, but to take them a few at a time, begin-
ning with those which are of most frequent
occurrence.
The Low Class Consonants.
This class contains 24 consonants.
They are pronounced in the ordinary or
Common lone of Voice.
The consonants of the Low Class of the
most frequent occurrence are : —
(pl pronounced khaw equivalent to kh (aspted).
15 „ chaw ,, ,, ch (soft)
JJ „ maw ,, ,, m
( 5
)
u
5 )
naw
>>
,, n
n
M
paw
) J
M P
V\
) )
faw
>>
„ f
*f\
)>
paw
If
M P
If
? »
raw
M
„ r
^
>>
saw
? ?
M s
v\
» J
taw
)>
„ t
*^
> f
taw
))
„ t
^
>>
law
)>
„ 1
'^
M
waw
;>
„ w
u
>>
yaw
>?
,, y
!f
yaw
> )
,, y
d
})
haw
))
„ h
^1
>>
ngaw
) >
,, ng
( 6 )
It will be seen that there are two forms each
equivalent to P. Y. T. lAi. n. £j.nj. Vi. I. but they
are pronounced exactly alike in each case. Some
words in Siamese are spelled with one character,
and others with the other character. The
characters marked with an asterisk {*) are less
commonly used.
Special attention should be paid to the letter
^ (ng). There are many words in Siamese which
have ^ as the initial consonant,
Europeans will as a general rule, find some
difficulty in pronouncing this letter as an initial
consonant. The best method to acquire the
pronunciation of initial ^ is to take such words
as "running or walking" and try to slur the
first two words together to produce the sound
'runningor' with the stress on the last syllable,
and then to make the sound ' ' ngor " by itself.
The remaining low class consonants will be
dealt with later (Chapter 10)
The Student is advised to write down these
characters several times on a piece of paper so
as to become familiarised with them.
N.R. — In writing Siamese characters, always
begin with the small circle which occurs
in all the characters except two. The
shapes closely resembling those of the
printed characters.
( 7 )
Exercise 1.
Read these Characters.
7
(=1
'n Q EJ VJ 1/^1 Jl !I1 s
<i
in
y
JJ fi a in g Fi u
"D
^
n
? 0) 2 s a u 3 T/i
Q
nj
-(V,/^. — The Siamese consonants are vocalised with
the sound 'aw' as in the word 'law/ just as
in English, the letters b.cd. are vocalised
as 'bee, cee, dee.'
Chapter II.
The Simple Vowels.
By ' simple ' vowels are meant vowels which
are represented by one character only.
Simple vowels can be divided into four
classes according to the position which they
occupy relatively to the consonant with which
they are sounded.
N.B. — The vowel characters can never stand
alond, they must be always accompanied
by a consonant.
1. Fir.sf Class. — Vowels written after the
consonant with which they are sounded.
( 8 )
"^ ■ Sounded as a in Father ex. m Kha
'} ,, um in Sum ex. m Khum
9^
,, (a very short) as the final a
in the word: America. f\t Kha'
The vowel t has a very short sound, and
the breath must be cut off sharply.
n and t cannot be followed by another con-
sonant in the same syllable.
Exercise 2.
Read these sounds.
m m m -m l^ i^ iii m ui ^i m T\ T\
m m m i^ h m ir\ l\^ in h m m m
* 'rt 'c\z m T. It it w. m w. r. iz t. %
m T. ai nji a:; i^ vc\ ut t\ T\ z ^i ^i
2. Scroll. fJ Class. — Vowels written Under-
neath the consonant with which they are
sounded.
■j Sounded as o6 short as in Cook f^ Khoo
n ,, ,, oolong ,, in Boot Pi Khoo
( 9 )
Exercise 3.
Read
THESE SOUNDS.
*P1
?
T
?
7
t
i
?
?
a
r
u
11
U
u
11
11
n 51
11 u
2
u
11
a
11
-3
11
VI
11
11
Oj
11
1
1
a =D
? 11
?
11
1/1
1
lAl
T
Vi
* TT
f\v* i-
IrtQ n
11
krt'r YM
v*/^\■r\^
1 n /n o ^- 1 rw\
^■P +
V»^Cii
a ottI
lloKl
\ac>
marked * see Chapter. 8.
3. Third Class.— -Vowels written ABOVE
the consonant with which they are sounded.
"* sounded as i (short) as in Hit h Khi
el ,, ,, ee{long) ,, See^Khee
«p ,, ,, eu (short) ,, the French word
Peu; no trueEngHsh equivalent. f\ Kheii.
fH Sounded as eu (long) as in the French
word Coeur; no true English equivalent.
PI Kheu.
•^ this vowel has a sound which is a mean
between the sound of a (short) as in
hat and li (short) as in hut.
The vowel ^ will be considered later as
it must always be followed by another con-
sonant.
.sv'«" Chapter ■!.
( 10 )
Exercise 4.
Read these sounds.
PI ^'Q!DflJJ14 JV^TlSiflEJ
PI ^!Q!Qfi3JU JlAIYlSVlfltJ
PI ^3!Qfi3JU ?l/^V1SWflEJ
n ^ Tan ^waiifiwjpi^
4. Foin-th Class. — Vowels written BEFORE the
consonant AFTER which they are sounded.
\a sounded as a in Fame e.g. LPl Kha.
\X ,, ,, a in Sand only longer, and
more drawled out LLPl Khaa.
|j sound as o (long) as in So. Ipl Kho.
y, ,, ,, i ,, as in Sigh. Ipl Khi,
h ,, ,, do. do. iPi Khi.
i and \ are sounded exactly alike.
( n )
Exercise 5.
Read these sounds.
tJJ Lf=l W m L!D - LQ m LVl [1 lH d
UJJ m LU U£^ LL!I1 LU LLWI UVl LL? U'Q LLIaI
1:j lf=i \ Ifi l!D It Iv^ Iti
WWUIWU|U|WW
m lf=i w m I'D b m m
IJI US la Ifl lu LU LLfl li
c
1«
li^
Ifl
\i
1?
I'D
\i
I;
la
LLU
Note. — The student should learn later on, the
names of the vowels in Siamese. They
are called t^ra' or mai as a general rule.
1 is called lakhang.
? n are called teen 6o and teen 6o respectively.
L is called mai nah.
1 ,, mai malai.
1 ,, mai mooan.
1 , , mai oh.
^ ,, mai pat'.
The rest are called sra, i.e. it ^ -i. ^ a sra um
sra a, i, etc.
U is called mai nah song an=double mai nah
( 12 )
CKapter III.
The Middle Class Consonants.
Words ending with jj u ^
The Middle Class Consonants, 9 in number,
(two of which are rarely used) are pronounced
in the common or ordinary tone of voice.
Four of them namely fl (?1 iJ '^ present no little
difficulty at first, as they have no exact English
equivalents.
fl This letter has a sound which may be
represented approximately by !| k and i g or
unaspirated k. The sound of the letter n is quite
different from that of h and this difference can
only be learnt from the teacher. Be very care-
ful not to pronounce it as Gaw.
^ This letter is about equivalent to tch or
dj. tj. It has a sound somewhat like t in the
word century when it is pronounced centjury.
(^ is sounded daw and is equivalent to d.
*/^ ditto. ditto, ditto, (rare)
(?1 This letter has a sound which is a mean
{ 13 )
between the sound of t and d. To produce it
try to say t, but draw the tongue away sharply
from the roof of the mouth and force the breath
a little.
* f\ ditto. ditto. ditto, (rare)
U is sounded baw and is equivalent to b.
LJ This letter has a sound which is a mix-
ture of ;:^ p and :\ b. To produce it try to say p,
but part the lips sharply and force the breath.
t) This letter has the sound of aw, it is
used sometimes as a consonant and sometimes as
a vowel. Q can be written after a consonant,
the combination has the same sound as that of
the simple letter only, ''.^. W taw UB yaw.
The student must be very careful to dif-
ferentiate the sounds of U, ll and W or fl, and
those of ^, PI and l/l or S.
Exercise 6.
Read these Sounds.
m n" ni n n n n n n m im In In In
^ ^ A Jk 1 "1 1
ST s:; "^1 s "^ '^ "^ '^ "^ L*^ LH Is h h
T 11
( 14 )
m ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ f\ ^ i^ LLi^ It^ '■f?i m
m K m ^ ^ f\ Pi ^ ^ i^ m 1^ 1pi 1pi
yi ut un 11 u D fi C L Lu Liu lu lu lu
ill iJ:; di iJ y" ^ ^ O iiJ LiiJ lij liJ liJ
i]-^ s^ fi^ D 3 y s ^s ^^ ^ "^ '^
1 ti
Special Points about the Letter q.
1. If the plain open sound of a vowel is
required, the consonant a (silent) must be writ-
ten with the vowel in the usual place.
As it has been remarked above, the vowel
marks cannot stand alone, therefore to express
the sound a um, etc., we must write Ql 01 and so
forth,
2. The letter a { silent ) must always be
written after a consonant in combination with
the vowel ^ if no other consonant follows.
Example f=l ^, etc., in exercise 4 are not
strictly correct, they should be written PTQ ^Q, etc.
For the sound of ^ alone we must write 00.
3. at the beginning of a word and not bear-
ing any vowel mark in combination with it, is
( 15 )
usually pronounced as short a, but in some words
as short aw, or short o.
4. Double Q Q sometimes occurs at the be-
ginning of a word, it is pronounced as aw (long).
Exercise 7.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
(!)• BT at an a Q a a QQ La Ltala la la
(2). m m m la m fa m na sa m m
na ^a la m ^a la Sa ^a aa aa m ^a
Words ending with jj u ^
Rule. — Syllables ending with the consonants
jj U ^ are pronounced as they would be
in English i. e. the final letter has its full
sound.
Examples, m koom TM charn m rong.
Exercise 8. (A)
READ THESE SOUNDS.
mjj mu m^ ni3J mu m^ m Bu
m m m uu m m ll'=j3j
T f ?
LL'^u LH^ hi m m ]hi iJu iJ^
U 11 II
^3j % ^^ 1?JJ Iju 1?^ m m m
U tl 11
( 16 )
iaIijj 1/Jiu iaIi3 ^ij m m % °ju 'g^
TfinU TITU 1/11^ !il3J HU 113 ^IJJ ^lU ^1^
I V t
aijj Q1U 013 Su Qu 8^ lajj lau lq3
The Unwritten vowel and the vowel o
When two consonants stand alone together,
a short 'o' sound is understood between them.
This unwritten vowel sound is a peculiar
modification of the usual short sound of o and
can only be learnt from the teacher. Ex. 8 B [i]
The vov/el ^ is used between two consonants.
It has a short sound which is a mean between
the sound of short a as in /tut and the sound of
short u as in /////. Ex. 8 B (ii),
The letter g can stand between two con-
sonants. It is then a semi-vowel and gives the
sound of aw (long) ; example WU tawn. Ex.
8 B (iii)
The letter "] can stand between two other
consonants, in which case it is a semi-vowel and
gives the sound of <'>oa ; example Will to-'ian.
Ex. 8 B (iv)
Exercise 8 (B)
READ THESE SOUNDS CAREFULLY, WITH
THE TEACHER.
(i) uu u^ m s^ n^ m u m lIjj nu n m m
^^ iu m iu Ll^3 m m m m m au m iJ^ ra
(11) m m '^u m m ^^ m m m m -^^ 'qj m m
( 17 )
m nu ?^ ?u V13J ilii uu m-im mm m '^u
(iii) nau via^ nau piqjj ejqu iw iw um "^m uqu mw
]\m m^ gau f=iQ3 w^ ]\m '^•m t\m mn nm 'im
(iv) ngu Yig<i mu e^qu mu jq^ i/^|]^ '^qj -^gu ijg<i uqjj iJgu
mxi ggu ra^ m^ jqsj mv. m^ mu mu <^'ii ago
Final fi ? tt) TlJ (1) are pronounced as u (n)
Examples. IJOJ boon mj karn m^ barn.
Exercise 8 C.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
ni? mn mnj Lunj i^^ mj mi au tsiei moj Jin
^^Hfi inn ijoj m m mm
N. B. — Final ? after another consonant is
pronounced awn {see Chapter 23).
Chapter IV.
COMPOUND VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
By 'compound vowels' are meant vowels
which are composed of two or more simple vowel
characters which however form together only-
one sound.
The mark + in the following example is
merely to indicate the position of the consonants.
( 18 )
L + 1 pronounced ow as in how; LPII Khow, LQT ow.
l" + „ er as in her.
This vowel must always have a consonant
following ''. [/■ ihl Khern
There are several long vowels compounded
with the vowel :;. All such compounds have a
very short sound with the breath sharply cut off.
i + :; pronounced eh' IK Kheh'.
LU" „ aah'LLPi:; Khaah'.
I.Z ,, Mh' Ik Khoh'.
i^X ,, awh' imr Khawh'.
Exercise 9
Read These sounds.
Lin
LSU
mi im
ifnj im
lai
mi
i™
mi L^i
*ljj:;
LC
Lr
l^t iz
IK
Lrc
ir.
IT. Ill"
*LK
im:;
LLlJ"
LLC ire
nut
wt
mt
llb:; LLUr
■Am
°TC
l^i:;
At Ilit
ht
\t]t
].it
111:; 1'^:
* m:
: IHT;;
L^i:;
iix mx
mx
imt
wit
[Hit iQr
Many Vowels in Siamese are combined with
the characters a. li. '3. In such cases the char-
acters Q. U. 1. partake of the nature of vowels
rather than that of consonants
* For the correct pronunciation of these syllables see
Chapter 8.
( 19 )
I. Combinations with a only .
L + pronounced as er in her ; im ter, im er.
L + Q^as above, only very short.
L + Q no true English equivalent, but approxi-
mately something like eugha ; LU0 meugha (dis-
syllabic).
L + a" as above only very short.
The sound L + Q can only be learnt from the
teacher.
Exercise 10.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
L3ja ira im im iw im iila laa l^b
*LJja:; l?q: imz Lfia:; imz imt iila^ taffi imt
im m LSQ L^a ifa ira ttia i,a'a tla
* tfla^i mz i%z imz iwz imz tSa:; taa: mt
II. Combinations with u only.
L+U No English equivalent, but something
like the French eni in the word ceinllez; lu^ neui.
This sound can be learnt properly from the
teacher only.
L+EJ pronounced ^ea or eer as in beer (dis-
syllabic.)
( 20 )
Ulit as above, but very short.
+T1 Has the long sound of i or as in aisle.
This combination gives a longer sound 1 or i
UlU nai.
+ii Has the sound of 6oi (dissyllabic); fin l6oi.
+^ Has the sound of ooi (dissyllabic) t\u looi.
4} Has the sound of i somewhat similar to
1 or 1 dtl li.
l+LI Has the sound of ohwi (dissyllabic), long
o ; \m dohwi.
Exercise 11.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
im Ljjn [.'^u liJli l(?iu du m iw m
L^!j iw L% ih mu [in itu w ih
*mz L^n:; i^uz [tut tmr \.iuz mz lq?j:; itm
mu mu '^lu iJiLi mu iiu <iiu mu qio
m m j^ ]\i} m iaIej m m lu
m m f} ]\u m ]t <iu w m
11 11 iiiiiiiiijti 11
m w sti iIej m iu ^ m
\m hu hn \]lu \m liu l^u 1m 1
go
!m
( 21 )
III. Combinations with '] only.
Xl has the sound of ooa (final only) m nooa.
+% as above but very short.
+T] has the long sound of ow, but longer
than L+1 \m now.
7] has the short sound of ue as in cue or iw.
m nue-niw.
?3 as above, but rather a longer sound ;
L + T no exact English equivalent but approxi-
mately aew ; \m naew.
LL + ■] has the sound of aaow ; LLUQ naaow
Exercise 12.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
m
m
m
11
Jl
aJ
m
m
TO
m
WL
vm
wn
wn
ra
m
Td
uig
aig
m
m
w\
M
%
fg
Dg
ag
m
m
m
tg
1g
&
m
LflQ
rni
\m
Ljg
vn
L'^g
Lug
im
UflQ
m\
mi
UJQ
vm
Lwg
LLUg
\xm
( 22 )
IV. Combinations of a. U. Q. together .
+m, has the sound of oy as in boy UfiU noy.
+1], has the sound of ooweh dissyllabic ; UIU
nooweh.
l-^U% has the sound of eeo (dissyllabic) ; LUtlQ
nt^eo.
I + W, no English equivalent but something
■ approximately like eughc-h (dissyllabic) ; iWU
neugheh.
Most of these sounds can only be learnt
properly from the teacher.
Exercise 13.
Read these Sounds.
wu wu iim ^m lIqlj nm mu mu mu
mu SQtj mu ^lu iIqli mu mu I'iu mu
lum iM lim lId'] iw'} itm mm lm im
lum iwu imu mu iiinu imu imu mu lbqu
There are few other diphthongs which are of
extreme rarity, /. <'., L+QLI 7u i+Ut
The exercises in this and in the preceding 3
chapters should be gone over carefully several
times with the teacher. The student should
have plenty of practice in writing the characters
also.
( 23 )
Chapter V.
THE TONES (INTRODUCTION).
In Siamese there are 5 distinct tones ; it is
absolutely essential that the student should be
able to recognise and to render them fairly ac-
curately if he wishes to make himself understood;
as the ' tone ' is an integral part of the word.
These tones are formed by altering the
jitch of the voice, and to a certain extent, by
3rolonging or. shortening the sound of the com-
jinatioij of characters affected.
It is a matter «f very -great difficulty to re-
present these tones on paper. ...^
The following method has however been
found to be the most satisfactory, in actual prac-
tice. The student, must however distinct-
ly bear in mind that the . Tones can only-
he properly learnt from the teacher, and
by constantly hearing the spoken lang-
uage.
Nomenclature of Tones.
Various names have been used by different
writers to designate the Tones.
They agree however in calling the first tone,
the Common Tone.
The other tones have been designated as
follows.
( 24 )
(i) The Rising, Question or Ascending Tone.
(ii) The Acute, Emphatic, or Circumflex Tone.
(iii) The Deep, Falling or Depressed Tone.
(iv) The Dropped, Low or Period Tone.
In this book the following names have been
used. (I) Common. (II) Rising or Question.
(Ill) Acute. (IV) Deep, or Falling. (V) Dropped,
or Low. Of the alternatives in 3.4 and 5 the
first names are to be preferred.
The relations of the Tones can best be un-
derstood from the following diagram.
THE TONE MODULATOR.
Tones
III
II
IV
( 25 }
The Arrow marked I. indicates the common
tone. It will be seen that it takes the central
line of the scale, numbered 0. (Do.) The student
must take whatever note or tone of voice suits
him best for his common tone and then derive
the other tones from it.
The numbers 1 to 4 of the scale represent
sounds of higher pitch than the starting point
(Common Tone)
The numbers -1 to -4 represent similar in-
tervals of lower pitch than the Common Tone.
The lengths of the arrows are intended
to represent the differences in length of the
sound. Thus if the length of Common Tone (I)
be represented by three beats, the Acute III. and
Dropped V. Tones would be two beats, and the
Eising II. and the Deep IV. Tones would be four
beats. The height of the arrows on the scale
represents the differences in pitch.
The Student should not try to learn all the
Tones at once. They should he taken one by one
in the order given and the student should refer
to the Modulator as he studies each tone.
A seperate copy of the modulator is included
with each copy of this book so that the student
can have it before him as he learns the tones.
All Siamese words can be divided into two
classes as regards their tones
A. Words which end (i) in long vowels,
(ii) In the sound of N. M. or Ng.
B. Words which end (i) in short vowels,
(ii) In the sound of K. P. T.
( 26 )
The first class is dealt with in chapters 6 and
7. The second class in chapter 8.
Chapter VI.
THE HIGH CLASS CONSONANTS, RISING
AND ACUTE TONES.
The Rising Tone (2) is formed by raising"
the voice gradually during the utterance of the
word. It starts from a lower pitch than the
common Tone and finishes on a higher pitch
than the common Tone.
The Rising Tone is slightly longer than the
Common Tone.
The High Glass Consonants all bear
the rising tone, that is to say, all words begin-
ning with one of these consonants must be pro-
nounced in the Rising or Question Tone of Voice.
N. B. — There are exceptions to this rule which
will be considered later, ( '^'c Chapter 8.)
The High Class consonants are 11 in number
but one of them is practically obsolete, and 3
others are but rarely used
The High Class Consonants. (Rising in-
tonation).
ll equivalent to Kh. Khaw,
il ditto. ditto, but is practically
( 27 )
obsolete, its place being taken by '3. in modern
Siamese. ^ is still found in old books
t3 equivalent to Ch. Chaw
W .. p. Paw
iri
F. Faw
H. Haw
T. Taw
S. Saw (saw law)
S. ,, (sawkhaw)
S. ,, (saw baw)
T. Taw
Letters marked with an asterisk * are of
rare occurrence in Siamese words.
The following exercise must be carefully
explained by the teacher, so that the student
may comprehend the difference between the com-
mon and the rising Tones.
( 28 )
Exercise 14.
Read the following Pairs of sounds
very carefully.
Common Rising Common Rising Common Rising
F11
Lm
21
L2T
1^ ll
In If
m
d LtJ
LLH
u
LL'tJ
m
flQ
Fi
tl'N
L^tJ
ai^
la
L3
EJ1U
1m
Note to Teachers. — Be most careful to
stop and correct the pupil every time he makes a
mistake in his tones. Neglect of this point will
induce a careless habit of not noticing the tones
sufficiently.
The teacher is also advised to exaggerate
the tones a little at first so as to make them
more distinct.
( 29 )
By trying to read in a sort of singsong-
voice, the tone differences will be more readily
appreciated.
The student is now advised to procure a
copy of the First Siamese Reading Book ( LLUll
LJEJU L?"] LfiJJ V\m which can be purchased any
where in Bangkok, price 28 atts, (12th edition)
and read carefully lessons 1 — 9 with the teacher.
He should not attempt lesson 10 until he has
mastered chapters, vii. viii. ix. in this book.
The Tone Accents.
There are four accents used in Siamese to
indicate the various tones. These accents are
placed over the initial consonants of syllables.
The Tone Accents are.
1
mai-4yk
accent.
2
%> mai-to
accent.
3
^ leyk-chet
accent.
4
+ kaka-bat
accent.
The first two (mai-ayk & mai-to) can be used
with all consonants, but the third and fourth
(leyk-chet and kaka-bat) are used only with con-
sonants of the Middle class.
It is very important now that the student
should be able to recognise each consonant at
sight and should know at once to which class it
belongs.
( 30 )
Also that he fully understands the difference
between the Common and the Rising Tones.
Hitherto no accents have been employed,
but we must now turn our attention to the tone
accents and their uses.
The Kakabat accent + is used only
with consonants of the Middle class. It
indicates that the Rising Tone must be
employed.
Exercise 15.
Read the following pairs of sounds
very carefully.
Common Rising Common Rising Common Rising
m
m
LLlJ
Lm
im
^
^
m
mm
ifeg
1^
1^
mi
m
m
I;
Lra
im
isa
[ff]
L01
^QU
4qu
iJntJ
inu^
111
LU
m
l^Q
m^
mi
The Acute Tone.
To make the Acute tone raise the voice
sharply as in exclamation.
( 31 )
The Acute Tone is much higher and sharper
in pitch than the common Tone, it is also con-
siderably shorter in length.
The Acute Tone is indicated by.
I. The Mai-to accent ±j over a Low
Class Consonant.
II. The Leykchet Accent ^ over a
Middle Class Consonant.
The Acute Tone cannot be formed
with the High Class Consonants.
Exercise 16.
Read the following Pairs of Sounds
VERY Carefully,
Common Acute Common Acute Common Acute
m
m
lUI
\m
•m
™
L^^
t
f,
LI^
LL?
l?l!]^
Jim
\.m
\m
LLU
LLU
e
ill
lil
ill
all
LL'^
^
m
The student will find it useful to aid him in
fixing these tones in his mind, if he practises
readmg these three tones consecutively, so as to
grasp their relative differences in pitch and length
as in the following exercise (17).
( 32 )
Exercise 17.
For practising the cadence Common, Rising,
Acute.
Read the following Sounds
very carefully.
Common Rising Acute
Pll
31
P11
^1
m
a-'
Lfl
in
A
m
«
m
m
1 +
1.
1.^
flQ^
m
m
m
mEj
LIT
LLCJ
£1
1% im
m'} mm mn
( 33 )
Chapter VII.
THE DEEP TONE AND THE DROPPED TONE.
The Deep Tone (4) is the lowest in pitch of
all the tones. Its length is about the same as
that of the Rising Tone.
To produce it, pitch the voice considerably
lower than for the Common Tone.
The Deep Tone is indicated by the Mai
ayk accent over High or Middle class
Consonants.
Exercise 18.
Read the following sounds very carefully.
Common Deep Rising Deep Rising Deep.
m
LLlJ
m
\
m
m
Is
A
m
31
131
31
eJi
3ig
m
1.
m
m
m
( 34 )
The Dropped Tone.
The Dropped Tone is produced by dropping
the voice sharply and uttering the sound from
the chest, somewhat in the way in which the
voice is dropped at the end of a sentence. Hence
some writers call this Tone the "Period" or 'Full
stop .' tone.
The Dropped Tone is shorter than the
Common Tone and 'does not drop quite so low as
the Deep Tone.
The Dropped Tone is indicated by :-
I. The Mai-to Accent ■u over High or
Middle Consonants.
II. The Mai-ayk Accent
Consonants.
over Low
Exercise 19.
Read these sounds very carefully.
Common Drop. Common Drop. Rising Drop.
f=11
Hi
m
T\
31
"Ql
in
SI
SI
^^
HI
IN
1
1
11
11
1/1 1
LlJl
L1J1
lia
t 35 )
REVISION OF THE FIVE TONES.
Exercise 20 (A).
HIGH CLASS CONSONANTS.
Rising Deep Dropped Rising Deep Dropped
U1
vn
m
m
iw
m
1^0
\iii 1'
3J
vn
■tnu
vnvi
A.
m
itm
km
31U
Vil^
313J
U'iJ
L^yg mil
Exercise 20 (B)
LOW CLASS CONSONANTS
Common Drop. Acute Common Drop. Acute.
L3J l3J m
m
m
\
\k
ir
ijj
lii
2^
L3J
u
11
21
U
11
g1
U1
T\
U1
Q1
2J
11
m
( 36 )
A.
VI
1
rm
•mu
hw
1/
m
PIU
m
m
\m
L«31
ik\
NT
'Him
itm
itm
lIj^
fi
\n \k 1?^
Pin
m
vm
EJIJJ
mi
m
Exercise 20 (C)
MIDDLE CLASS CONSONANTS.
Common Deep Dropped Acute Rising.
m
LLlJ
iJqjj
LQfJ
m
1-^
iIqjj
m\
m
i:
u
LLlJ
mu
S1U
^
I0JJ
Lay
m
L
LLlI
Lin
LBJJ
m
L^
A
u
LLll
\
niu
ilau
LQEJ
( 37 )
Chapter VIII.
FINAL CONSONANTS, TONES OF WORDS
ENDING IN K. P. T. AND SHORT VOWELS.
There are only six different final consonant
sounds in Siamese.
These may be divided into two classes,
(i) Final M. N. Ng sounds which can take
all the tones.
(ii) Final K. P. T. and short vowel sounds
which do not follow the rules give above
in Chapters 6-7.
Rule 1. Words ending in the sound of
K. P. T. f=i. n. l]. VI. S. etc. have the sound of the
final letter clipped short. Thus to pronounce
such a combination as WW pA.t', do not let the
tongue drop from the roof of the mouth as is
done in pronouncing final T. in English, uin nak',
Pf\\ kheep'.
Rule 2. Final l?l !!i 2 S or other letters
equivalent to d. ch. s. are pronounced as t.
clipped short. ( Rule 1 ) Examples, m meet',
pm khat' etc.
Rule 3. Final IJ IN fl B. or P. are pronounced
as lI clipped. Example ?ll reepb'.
Words ending with the sound of K. usually
have n as the final consonant.
Words ending with the sound of P. (iJ)
usually have ll as the final consonant.
Words ending with the sound of T. usually
have ^ as the final consonant.
( 38 )
Words ending with the sound of K. P. T-
can never take any tone accents, with the
exception of a few onomatopoeic words which
follow the ordinary rules see F. S. R. Lesson 119
TONES OF WORDS ENDING IN K. P. T. WITH LONG
VOWELS OR DIPHTHONGS.
Rule I. If the initial consonant belongs
either to the High, or to the Middle Class the
tone is Deep.
Rule II. If the Initial Consonant belongs
to the Low Class, the tone is the Dropped
Tone. ^^^^^^
Exercise 21.
Read the following sounds very carefully.
Long Vowels. Final K. sounds.
High Class
Consonants.
Deep Tone
Rule I.
tain 'tJin EJin
w ^n m
LL-an LL^n um
an ^n un
!1 11 ii
Itan l^n li
,Ejn
LSEjn [.mn lum
Middle Class
Consonants.
Deep Tone
Rule I.
nin '^in mn
nn ^n m
unn LLsn LLi?in
nn '^n m
II li u
Inn I'^n li
m
in^n L%n mm
Low Class
Consonants.
Dropped Tone
Rule 11.
f=nn i\T\ uif=i
m
an
am LL^n Li^n
Fin 'an ^n
!J U tl
Im li
nn m
mtjn L^iLin mr\
anu fiiu viiij
aij tm m
UaU LmU LLVllJ
au niJ viu
!1 U II
laii IflU IviiJ
Latju Lmu L^^ll
( 39 )
Final.
P. sounds.
mu mu am
nil ^u 01J
LmU LL^U LLaiJ
nu m QiJ
U tl !I
IniJ IpiiAi Ian
Lmu Lmu latju
Final T. Sounds.
LL-ai?! iim
m
1m 1(
m
i^m mm im
ni7\
ili^
ais
m
ilin
a^
Lini^i
Ull^
Liai^
n^
11
an
11.^
\m
liJ^
lavi
itm im
mm
mw !inij unii
m fu ^11
LLFllJ LL^HU nun
m tail m
II !1 U
Ipiu 1™ ll
,^1J
LmiJ L^lIU L^^U
m^ ?ia uijn
m m m
am ira am
m m m
II U II
Im °\m 1m
mm ifm mm
TONES OF WORDS ENDING IN K. P. T. WITH
SHORT VOWELS OR ENDING WITH THE
THE SOUND OF A SHORT VOWEL
OR DIPHTHONG.
Rule I.
If the initial consonant belongs to
either the High or Middle class the
tone is Deep.
r 40 )
Rule II. If the initial consonant belongs to
the Low class the tone is Acute, but
in these words the acute tone is natur-
ally not so strongly marked as it is in
other words which take the acute Tone *
N.B. — The short vowels are t .^ « « ? and the un-
written vowel. The short diphthongs are
those compounded with z ^ a ,
All other vowels and diphthongs are long.
Exercise 22.
FINAL K. p. T. WITH SHORT VOWELS AND
FINAL SHORT VOWELS.
READ THESE SOUNDS.
(Rule I.) Deep Tone.
"HZ ^ ^ "n w m !an m w au" liiz
m uz m m m w m viz m
n^ n H n ni^ nifi nn nn nu nu ifiiz
^■u '^7\ 9 u:; iln tin m m m m
T
(Rule II.) Acute Tone.
hz h f\ h m m m m Piu m \mz
m 3z 5 m m m m m m m
* Some writers consider that these words have a tone
which differs from all the other tones thus constituting
a sixth Tone. It is more correct to regard these words
as taking the Acute Tone.
The Siamese grant the existance of five tones only
equivalent to fl fl H H fi
( 41 )
CKapter IX.
Vi U1 (HAW NUM) AND RECAPITULATION op TONES.
The Rising Tone can be formed also with
Low Class Consonants. This is done by placing
the High Consonant Vi is front of the initial Low
Class Consonant. The character Vi is silent in
such cases and is equivalent merely to a Tone
Accent. Vl used in this way is called Vi in ' haw
num ' or leading h.
VI can only be used for the purpose of form-
ing the Rising Tone before such Low Class
Consonants which have no equivalents in the
High Class.
That is to say, Vi can only be used before
^. jj. u. (m.) u. nj. 7. J. &. (w.)
Thus Vi in front of any of these letters makes
it virtually equal to a High Class letter.
Exercise 23 (A)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOUNDS.
<:i.
Iv
Villi VI3J im miv. am vi^i mm
imm LMUQ ivmu mm mojInI wb
\m imm m^ 1'
LViUU LVi^tlQ ViU3J im iiVm V\W LViJJ
viu m mi^ LviJEiEj
In addition to Vi, the mai-ayk . and mai-to
sj accents may be used. As Vi plus a Low Class
Consonant is equivalent to a High Class Con.-
nonant the tones given by the addition of mai-
( 42 )
ayk and mai-to to such a combination will follow
the rule for High Class Consonants i.e.
vm is pronounced with the Rising Tone.
^^ „ „ Deep Tone.
,|^_ ;, ,, Dropped Tone.
Exercise 23 (B)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOUNDS.
vi3jn V13J1 lvi3J \m m vi? mn
mm Lrai vm vieju LvifQ^ vmm
\ym imu vimu imu mm mw
Remember the rules for final K. P. T.
Therefore ViJJlfi and y\m will be pronounced
with the Deep Tone.
Exercise 23 (C)
READ THE FOLLOWING SOUNDS.
vwm vm vmx\
LTOfi iran
vm\ ivmi mm
\vm mm)
v\m v\Vit vm
viSn vm
vm Lvi^!j^ vm
vifn vm
Note. — There are four common words which
have Q in front instead of Vi. Three of
them have the mai-ayk accent as well.
Therefore they take the deep tone :—
Q^ to be or to live
u
HU] do not (negative imperative).
"him sort, kind. The fourth word is QEJIfl to
want
( 43 )
RECAPITULATION OF TONES.
The following table should be learnt by heart
as it is a short and convenient form of the rules
which govern the tones,, and shows the effect of
each accent on the different classes of consonants.
TABLE OF TONES. A.
For words not ending with the sound of K. P. T.
or with short vowels.
Accents.
Consonants.
High Class
Mid. Class
Low Class
No Accent
Rising
Common
Common
Mai-ayk .
Deep
Deep
Dropped
Mai-to ij
Dropped
Dropped
Acute
Leyk-chet=ni
Acute
—
Kakabat +
—
Rising
—
V1 +
—
Rising
VI*
—
Deep
V1 +
—
— ■
Dropped
( 44 )
TABLE OF TONES. B.
For words bearing no tone accents and ending
with the sound of k. p. t. or with short vowels.
Initial Consonants
High
Middle Low
Words ending in
K. P. T. with Long
vowels or diphthongs
Deep
Deep
Dropped
Words ending in
K. P. T. with Short
vowels or ending with
short vowels only
Deep
Deep
Acute
Note. — The onomatopoeic words referred to on
a ij
page 38 are such words as uri mn Mfl
they take the Dropped Tone.
There are also a few words beginning with
middle class letters and ending with K. P. t, or a
short vowel which take the leyk-chet ^ accent
and hence have the Acute Tone, e.g. flfl '^m m\\K
Common
m
la
aivi
\.w
m
m
mil
lf=ijj
( 45 )
Exercise 24.
THE FIVE TONES.
Rising Acute Deep
31
P11
a'l
1«
Is
1^
imi
Lviu'n
viiln
V1U1
Ufa/
IviJ
EJBU
WflU
6m
'tll^l
'di^
l/i'lJJ
mil
mil
313J
Lm
im
tm
^nu
21^
h
*
L2n
uw
t
^s
F
til
vira
1
1/
i
MOT
mm
ila
Dropped.
r U
Fll 211
la 1^
Lu'l LVIUT
U1
1? V"
mi
m
im tm
mil
Id
ag
131
VII
Vll^
( 46 )
The Student should now read carefully les-
sons 10-32 in the First Siamese Reading book.
He should not yet however try to translate any
of it until he has mastered chapters 11-18 of
this book.
It will be often found that the student, al-
though he can read his tones in a certain order
fairly accurately, yet when he tries to read those
same tones in a different order will fail to re-
produce them correctly. He is therefore recom-
mended to read the following exercise very care-
fully several times until he can produce any three
tones in any order.
This exercise contains all the possible per-
mutations of 5 tones taken in any order 3 at a
time.
It also forms a graduated reading exercise,
since the combinations of characters used in-
crease in complexity from Part I to Part V.
Note. — This Exercise may be omitted by those
who are able to make the tones fairly
accurately.
( 47 )
Exercise 25 A.
Part I.
(a) im m
m m
Lm m
L3J1 'JH
(b) Lm m
L^n tin
LU1 211
Lin ^T
L?^1 til
(c) Lfi vn
Lpn ri
Lfii m
LQT Hi
LYii m
u
n
11
2^
Ifl
tl
I
II
yi
u
Yl
II
X\
II
Ifl
II
T
II
Yl
II
in
II
tl
II
2^
JJ
II
u
(d) Lm m
L'D'i m
L=in 'h
L^i di
Li/^n vn
(e) Lfil m
Llflll
LW
LSI
EJ1
m
h
Lm m
Part II.
(a) mi m
LSI w
Lm in
Lm 31
LCJl fil
Yl
u
Vi
II
u
EJ
u
I
U
11
Yl
II
ej
II
11
'I
EJ
II
PI
!iii
LfJl
m
LLEJ
2^
(b) m
vn
m 21
vn an
Cvil Ivi
LYl
Is
h
(C) L?i1
m
VI
II
LVl
LLVI
(d) m
vn
Ltn
Lvn
HI LLVl
Fn Id
m 'En
h 'in
m EJ
?1 EJ
m m
EJ1 L^l
fn Lv^
?n Ivi
211 m
( 48 )
(e) 1 ' 'i
w m ^
Ifi m u
LLCJ m Lm
Ell Lvi \.h
Part III.
(a) JJ1 7\ m
un m m
m h V1JJ1
111 LSI in
(b) 01 fn ni
3 ViJJl li
11 !1
1^ Id
Vl^
m vif^n J
11
, . .ii 111/
(c) m b vn
1^
LLI
ur\ ra
1!
1!
7
a
PI
Ml
?nu
^nu
ihi
11
1
dl
mu
ifitj
S1
1
LLn
Min
m
LMUQ
(d) Llll
EJl LLfl
2>
in
i?n
(e) LLU
1/
LLU
ir
u
? sni
m m
Vi^l EJ
11
a 1/
'ti nn
^ 1pi
11
1/ 4|
Mfn LLLI
I Pi)
LL!D 1J1
3J1 Vlfn
10 m\
Part IV.
(a) EJiu mM m
A oj a
(b) 31^ L^ll lSq
31U L110 L2U
'QU Llia IJQ
11
im mi 313J
(c) mu L& mo
I'iiu m'3 Lfio
m La m
ivm im ium
m
liln mm
( 49 )
(d) mu Ivioj LmQ
WM lim
m
m?\ mm lSli'T
Imi
mu
nm
mn an w
11
vdiw m i^m
\v\mhu mp
LLLJ
Tif]
(d)iAlin mn lS^
[h) im
Jfjg mtj?
yauviJJinvitjgu
\.m mm m
viun vin LOT
(e) Su & m
raQ^
im
li^fj miTi LLiJ:;
vm fi iif}
m
u
L^U^
m
m?J3J ™ LQLJ1?1
v\m mi mxi
Sti
mii
m
, , Si 2-* c!i
ii^ m lia
J1^
miu
m^
(e) m mf] [■um
1 ij K
Part V.
(c) m
am
m
Lf an fnn if^
(a)ai3j yiu im
L^tJiJ m
[.m mu If^n
[m im imw
m^
ml
m
1
S^ mn n
( 50 )
Chapter X.
Pronunciation of Double initial
CONSONANTS. THE REMAINING CHARACTERS
AND MARKS USED IN SIAMESE. ANOMALIES
OF SIAMESE PRONUNCIATION.
PronuncAation of Double Initial Consonants.
Siamese words which have two initial con-
sonants fall into two classes,
(A) Words having either fi j >] 1. r. w. follow-
ing a consonant equivalent to K. or P. (and T,
very rarely.)
In such cases the two initial consonants are
pronounced together. Note in these cases the
tone accent is placed over the second consonant.
Examples. wr\ pia. mm klong i/jg twee.
°M] khwa or qua,
Exercise 25 B.
Read these
Words.
mm
iJt^i
i\m
P1J1JJ
pi^ijj
pi^^
WC^QLJ
nen-3
fifijj
Lll^^JU
Lira
iiIm
n^jj
Ifi?
n^u
m
m^^
T\m
mir.
ium
imr.
LiJm
Injs
Ml
m
m
VQ% LiJ^an wm
m\
mr\
mm
m
^mz
iJffl
( 51 )
(B) Words whose initial consonants are other
than theabove. In these cases(i)The first consonant
is sounded as if it were separated f rom'the second
consonant by the vowel t and thus the word be-
comes dissyllabic, example TiVil? is pronounced
ta'harn just as if it had been written Ti:;vn?.
(ii) The initial consonant determines the tone
of the second syllable and any tone-accent over
the second consonant must be regarded as be-
longing to the first consonant, and as such
determining the tone of the second syllable.
Examples,
am (Kha'yum)
second
syllable
Rising Tone.
tarn
7?
Deep
lin
?7
Dropped ,,
m (Cha'nee)
>>
Common ,,
m
7;
Dropped ,,
m
77
Acute ,,
The position of the tone accent will often
show the pronunciation of this kind of word
where otherwise ambiguity might arise.
Examples.
But.
\.m
chaang
Common Tone.
im
77
Dropped
Tone.
cha'ngaa ,,
77
LLTl.l
Acute
77
mi
( 52 )
Exercise 25 C.
Read these Words.
wi lAijji mt m mm lltiq
m
2fn imei^ LLtaEj^ wn
1
muii miu Tdii
■nwu irauQ mm imu mu auu
For further examples of this, the student is
referred to the First Siamese Reading Book
lessons 33^^38.
Other Characters and marks used in Siamese.
1 The Less common Loiv class cov sonants : —
Fl khaw, equivalent to kh, this letter is
practically obsolete, its place being taken by Fi
with the one exception of the word P10. "neck."
^ khaw (kh)
bli naw (n)
tU Chaw (ch)
^ taw (t)
1^ law (1)
^ taw (t)
2. The signs for the numerals.
12345678
9
The Siamese numerals are used in exactly
the same way as the ordinary Arabic numerals
e-g. 267— labd
( 53 )
3. The Fo/f.r Sansktii vowels.
There are four Sanskrit characters used in
Siamese, they partake of the nature of a vowel
and a consonant combined. They are not of
frequent occurrence.
r] equivalent to 1 reugh or 1 ri
rj] ,, 7B reugh
J] ,, i leugh
T\] ,, m leugh
Note. — The character ij] is often used as being
equivalent to WQ the sign of a question.
4, — The Accent d {Leyk-paat).
This Accent is placed over consonants. It
merely shortens the sound of the syllable with-
out affecting its tone.
It should be noticed that when this'accent is
used in conjunction with the vowel L, the sound
of L (A as in same) is altered to that of short e (as
in pen), e. g. im is pronounced 'hen' not 'hane.'
Note. — The accent d is usually omitted from the
word LIJU (to be), but this word must always
be pronounced as if the accent d were
written there, e. g. Lilu == pen not pane
( 54 )
5. — The mark g' (karan.)
When the mark c is placed over a consonant
or vowel, that consonant or vowel is not pro-
nounced, ('.(i. WS (boot.)
For a complete list of common words having-
a silent letter c. See Chapter 23 of this book.
6. — The sign ^ means that the word or syllable
preceding it, is to be repeated, eg. uafJ ^ boi boi.
7. — The sign °i is used chiefly in official docu-
ments and Royal proclamations. It means ' and
so forth according to the recognised formula.'^
This sign is used after the name TM^im = Bang-
kok thus n?-3 iW^ a short way of writing nj^ \m
wn\W\W\l which is the full name of the City of
Bangkok. °^fil is equivalent to "etc."
8. — The sign @ shows the beginning of a
chapter or paragraph, The sign ^% show the
end of a paragraph or chapter. The sign ii>-
is equivalent to the word ' finis ' at the end of a
book. These signs are obsolete in modern
Siamese, but they are met with in old books
Modern Siamese has, to a great extent
adopted European punctuation.
Anomalies of Siinnese Proiiiinr/mtinn.
1. Initial Yl? tr is pronounced like H (s) e. g.
V1J11J is pronounced sap as if written T(W.
( 55 )
2. Initial PI? (t'r) should properly be pro.
nounced as written, but it is vulgarly pronounced
as V3 ( kr ), e. g. w\ is vulgarly pronounced kra.
3. Double jj is pronounced as if it were the
vowel ^ with U e. g. OT is pronounced sun.
4 Final l preceded by another consonant is pro-
nounced awn, e. g. mi la'kawn.
5. J preceded by ?i or '^ at the beginning of
a word is usually silent in monosyllables, e. g.
fsla^ is pronounced soi ( ^atl)' %^ is pronounced %^
Note. The common word Ira who ? is often
vulgarly pronounced m
6. Double nifii in a word. The first ^ is
pronounced as n, e. g. ^OJttjT sunya.
7. The initial s or t sounds of certain words
are very apt to be interchanged by the common
people, e.g. truu (ta'non) ''road" is often pro-
nounced sa'non, and the word inw. ( sa'p^n )
"bridge " is often pronounced ta'pto.
8. n after \ is silent, e. g. \\} pronounced as
if written \^
9. The short vowels ■= ? when final and usually
with J\ (final also) are silent in words of Pali
derivation e. g. iw\ pronounced 'hate' not hatoo.
'2^^ pronounced chat not chati.
( 56 )
10. The word ^^ t'ooa is very commonly pro-
nounced as t'ohwa.
11. R. sounds in Siamese words are habitually
pronounced as L. by Chinese and persons of
Chinese descent.
12. Very often L. is vulgarly omitted e. g. the
town Bang-pla-soi is often called Bang-pa-soi.
13. In words of two syllables or more, of Pali
and Sanskrit origin (as a general rule), the final
consonant of all the syllables before the last must
be fully sounded.
Example. iJjifiin pratana njumj Kromakarn
Ll/lQm taywadn.
14. In words beginning with U? a short ' o '
sound is understood after the u.
Example. uflQU boriwayn.
The student should notice the Siamese order
of the consonants, as this order has been observ-
ed in the Vocabulary at the end of the book.
■3 Fi a ^ VI iii Q a
m
liiim
'an
( 57 )
Exercise 25 D.
Read these Words.
lJK3Jim
W
L^^U OJIU
U3s! mn
nifi umli^Ej
jrjn ilnjnjn iraQiu iiwiii mih mmm
iJn?sr^ jjuhIj mf\i m\m fsnilin miiJ'^u
1
]\fj^mm \m lupiIpulj
l/^J1V13JW
viniJ m^ nitwi^ mim m'mm miii
Chapter XL
THE NUMERALS.
The Cardinal Numerals are : —
0.
o fg
4 d
i
1
51 v\m mf
5 d
vn
2
la ?im
6 b
vin
3
en ?iijj
7d
Cm
( 58 )
* N. B. — ]MX] means one only.
8 d
9 ^
10 510
11 SlGl
12 cjilai
13 sicn
14 Gld
15 Gl5
16 sib
17 cFid
18 Gid
19 s\^
20 Ifflo
21 to
22 ifflte
30 cno
40 do
50 So
60 bo
70 do
Lfll
iu
mm
'mw\
ill \m
80
90
100
101
102
200
300
1000
1001
do
LLlJl?! m
tm
2000
10000
mjjiu
100000
^iu
wilL
1,000000
iraiji ail
10,000,000
i^o irfi ill
c5)oo ran ViU^
510S1 mi \.m
siolai JQLJ ?i!]^ etc.
iHioo ?\w rm
moo ?i13J Iq?J etc,
Giooo mi viu^
(j)ooGi MU LQl?]
ifflooo m^ m
siooooViSuVlU^I
siooooo LLfilJ VIU'3
ei.oooooofnUVIW
510.000.000
( 59 )
The Ordinals are formed by prefixing ^ to
the Cardinals e. g. t V\m first t fia^ second.
The Numeral Adverbs are formed from the
Cardinals by the addition of the words, m or t
e.g. VIU mm or viu ViU^ once, m^ m or ^g^vi twice.
Note, (i) m^ and mm are usually placed last
in the sentence, (ii) viu^ ViU^= The first time.
The words VIU or Ti are usedof separate occasions
as m the sentence Til Ii 1\m m. Do this twice
In such expressions as ' twice as large ' the
word Lvil is used instead of VIU, example U Lviaj
riQI UU ?SQ^ ll/n- This is twice as large as that
The Distributives are formed with the word
VC Example in the sentence "give these men
three ticalseach" the latter part would be expressed
by m v\t, mil vfm
Fractions Half is expressed by the word
ra or ™. Note, ra^ mi half a yard mi PIJJ
a yard and a half. Other fractions are expressed
by such phrases as i m\i immu Vim lit. " four
parts, take one " so 4 or more briefly v\m fm fi
( 60 )
Dcrimal Fractioji.y. are called IRH ^11. Thus
•35 would be LFiH iu, wm W\.
ViiJiiar Frart/oits are called IFIH 'k'm. Thus |
would hem^ IFIM ^™ Ml
The following Pali numerals are sometimes
used.
one LQn
five linj^^
nine UC
two \l]
six 'iJfl
ten mz
three \nf
seven i(?\Z
eleven mn YlR"
four SPTJI
eight Q^"
twelve ^Qlfff^:;
Chapter XII.
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE(INTRODUCTORY)
The following rules should be carefully noticed.
1. There are no grammatical inflections of
any kind in Siamese : the individual words re-
main the same always.
2. There is no definite article 'the' in Siamese,
but its place is taken by the words 14 this, these
and UU that, those.
3. The verb LlJu ' to be ' is usually omitted
( .61 )
in many cases in which it would be used in
EngHsh.
It is always omitted when used with a
Predicative adjective, eg. This horse is black
fjTU^l lit. "horse this black" but the verb Lllu
must always be used with a Noun complement,
or a predicative adjective used as a Noun e.g.
He is a soldier LSI Lllu wm.
4. The verb ' to be ' used in the sense of
' to live/ or ' to be situated ' is translated by QLI
Siamese (not Lllu). e.g. "That book is on the
table." ViuJa m m mXtt. Lit. Book that is on
table.
d.
5. The verb JJ ' to have ' can be used im-
personally to mean * there is or there are ' in
which cases the verb 3J stands first in the sen-
tence ( cf . French il y a).
t:, ^. „ ( mi S JJT I have horses.
Examples J ^ i. , ^ i^ „, , . ,
J JJ JJ'l QU VI liU Therearehorsesthere
\ SI
6. The subject comes before the verb and
the object follows the verb except in certain re-
lative sentences, just as in English.
( 62 )
Examples \fS^^\ ^ I have a house.
( JJlin ^U 3J L'^U The horse which I
have is ill.
7. The Negative 111 (not) always comes be-
fore the verb, but in cases where the auxiliary-
verb m (can) is used, the negative \ii is placed
c
before the auxiliary e.g. [ii w\ (cannot).
W. LU im m 1 do not see horses.
mi m !ji W l cannot seehorses.
8. Adjectives always come after the Nouns
which they qualify, r. tj. |ji (^i black'horses ; !jl
30^ mj my horses ; m U this horse. But if a
possessive or a demonstrative adjective e.g. my,
your, this, those etc., is used together with an
adjective of quality, the possessive or demon-
strative adjective must follow the adjective of
quality.
Examples.
i^
3J1 m l\m m My black horses, lit.
^ Horses black my.
!ji W\ tTu Those black horses,
lit. horses black those
But note m m m Those horses are black.
If these three kinds of adjectives are used
together the demonstrative adjective takes pre-
cedence of the possessive adjective only.
( 63 )
9. Questions can be formed by adding the
word Wfl sometimes written t]] to the end of a
sentence thus.
V11U t V\mm You have books.
Have you books ?
10, In questions introduced by interrogative
adverbs, Where ? Why ? When ? How much ?
How many ! etc. the order of the words in the
Siamese sentence is usually the reverse of the
order in the corresponding English sentence.
Examples. (1) Where is your new book?
viu^ialra "am mi m ^\m
u
Lit. Book new yours is where.
(2) When will you go
mu "^t, iiJ L3JQb
Lit. You will go when ?
(3) How much money have you ?
Lit. You have money how much ?
Note. — The word V\TB or rf] is not used in ques-
tions introduced by interrogative adverbs.
11. Pronouns are not used elliptically in
Siamese, as a rule the noun has to be repeated.
.eg. " My book is large, but yours is small "
is translated as if it were " My book is large but
your book is small.
(
64 )
Vocabulary I.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
I
this, these
30^ mj
my mine
m
that, those
im mx
your yours
m
I
^m LSI
his hers its
their
i/iiu
you
im \r\
ours
LSI
he, she, they
f, mx
where
vn
we
How much
iij
to go
lIu
money, silver
house, home
horse
to have (there
is there are)
black
vnwia
book
\m\
red
\m
new
MU
stone
Ivinj'
large
La?jg
green
small
ang
white
m
but
u
snake
LLJ^
and
mx
to see
\
in
11
to look at
( 65 )
Exercise 26.
Read and Translate into English.
1 iji Su m 2 ^ 'nm ^u LM
II
7 jjTu IviQj UPi JJ1 uu mn 8 un u nu Lvn b p
9 mS^lviQjri] 10 viijJquuIvijj
10 ^u liJ m\i 12 vn'u \m m i\.m rf|
13 m t m m im ^ m u t m lu mu aa^ m
15 fiilwojaQ^i'mjafj^lviu 16 mill inulviaj
Exercise 27.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. This stone is green. 2. We have horses.
3. This snake is small. 4. They have money.
5. We go home. 6. My new horse is black.
7. How much money have they ? 8. Our books
( 66 )
are black. 9. Where is your book? 10. Where
is my red book ? 11. This snake is small and
that snake is large. 12. Those books are large.
13. Have you a white horse ? 14. I see that
white horse. 15. He has a green snake. 16. My
horse is white but yours is black.
Note to the Student :
The exercises from English to Siamese
should be done first orally with the teacher, and
then written out in a book for him to correct.
Note to the Teacher :
The sentences in the above exercise are not
at all idiomatic ; for example, the designatory
particles have been omitted for the simple reason
that they will be learnt in the next chapter. This
exercise [21] should be re-translated after hav-
ing done exercises 28 and 29. This has been
done intentionally in order not to introduce the
student to too many difficulties at once.
Chapter XHI.
THE NOUN.
Like all other parts of speech in Siamese,
the Noun is invariable as regards the inflec-
tions of Number, Gender, and Case.
NUMBER. To form the Plural of nouns :
(1) The word 'mill' (many) is used with
the noun repeated, or with the designatory
( 67 )
particle ( r. hijf. ) c. g. ''3)1 vimu jll " Horses, lit.
Horse many horses.
(2) The plural can also be expressed by
such phrases as (1) " LVldru, LVifinmi, " this lot
that lot. (2) "wn" company, or 'llJjm' tribe.
Examples
m ivm U These horses.
jH The horse tribe.
When the Singular is required ViU^ or mui
(one) is used, c g. Ul 3J1 \MJl one horse.
GENDER, of persons is shown by the
words eT'anLI (man) for the masculine, and
cfvi^^ (woman) for the feminine.
Examples
d
m\ child.
L^n u'sm boy.
\m U Vlf4 girl.
The sex of animals is shown by the words
ra eT for the male, and m ife for the female.
( 68 )
JJT horse (generally speaking. |
Examples ]
mm eT stallion.
m m mumare.
Exception in^ elephant.
m miu bull elephant.
lil^ W cow elephant.
Note •Q'1'3 LtJ0n white elephant
The young of animals is shown by the word nn.
foal
Examples
mm
m m m u colt
U IJ
m h m L^LJ filly
CASE. — ThePossessive case in shown by the
word •flQ^ (of).
Example vn^ 510^ !j1. The horse's tail.
The word LLTl is sometimes used as a sign of
the Dative case.
Example
f
LQT L-JU m
mun
LLfl^U
Give me the money.
( 69 )
The word Lin however is more commonly
omitted.
Classes of Nouns.
1. Simple Nouns. Composed of one word
only.
Example. \n water, UJJ breast, Is heart.
2. Compound or Derivatire Nomis. Very
many Siamese nouns are formed by the juxta-
position of two Simple nouns.
141 liJJ milk. lit. water of the
breast.
Examples J Ul (?n tears, lit. water of the eye.
yi h will, intentions, lit. water
of the heart.
There are many nouns compounded with such
words as UT water, m child, W\ father, LIJJ mother,
etc. Note the following.
MB m cook, lit. father (of the) kitchen.
m l3J fruit, lit. child (of the) tree.
fin till cartridge, lit. child (of the) gun.
11
m LJB sailors, lit. children (of the) ship.
( TO )
im m river, lit. mother (of) water.
LLJJ LVIC^n magnet, lit. mother (of) iron.
The student will doubtless notice many more
compound nouns of this type by glancing through
the Siamese English Dictionary.
3. Verbal Nouns. Nouns can be formed
from verbs by the addition of the word T\V (work).
Example, L^U 111 to walk, nil Ml 111 walking.
Many nouns equivalent to English nouns
ending in-or and-er denoting the doer or maker,
(ageiit), are formed in Siamese as follows.
110 to buy, EvI "M purchaser, lit. the person
^ buying.
[W lIq to sew, h^ mil im tailor, lit. h^ workman
to sew clothes.
lin to hire, EJ JU till tenant, lit. the person who
^ receives the hire.
ijn M tj m ih landlord, lit. the person
^. who allows the hire.
Note. FluliimfitJ bachelor, lit. man no have
wife.
4. Abstract Nouns. Can be formed from
adjectives and verbs by the addition of the word
f^igijj, which is equivalent to the English
suffix, "ness."
Examples
( 71 )
7\ good, mi3J 7\ goodness.
rm to fear, ram mi fright.
mih anxious, raiUTQlil'^ anxiety^
Abstract nouns are used as little as possible
in Siamese, as the Siamese idiom favours the
concrete rather than the abstract.
Names of the races of mankind are always
accompanied by the word PIU person or 'DIQ people,
Man, m CJ 'sm.
Examples \ A Chinaman, ^u f=iu V\mor m f^n.
The Burmese, ^ig WJj'l.
Specific names of different kinds of birds,
fishes, fruits, flowers, trees, snakes, etc. are
always preceded by the generic word for
bird," fruit, etc.
un bird.
Examples Ufl flCTan sparrow.
lifimiW eagle.
Exceptionslfl hen, LlJl^ duck, vm goose.
( 72 )
The Designatory Particles.
The use of the designatory particles, (piece
words ) is an important, Siamese idiom. These
words are used with every concrete Noun in
Siamese.
For example, the Siamese always say
" horses three animals," where in English we
simply say " three horses," "Boys two persons,"
for "two boys," "Cup, one round thmg," for
" a cup," and so forth.
There are a great many of these designatory
particles, which are used for different classes of
objects.
It is very important for the student to learn
the more common of these designatory particles,
and to clearly remember for what classes of
objects each one is used, as it sounds ludicrous
in Siamese when these particles are misused ;
for instance, in talking of knives or pointed ob-
jects, to use the designatory particles which is
applied to hollow or round objects, or vice versa.
The following is a list of the more common
designatory particles which should he learnt
carefully.
Qli for persons only,
Examples
a man, m EJ flirj P^ wm
three boys, L^n U Tin mi m
girls (plural), m CJ m)<i wm m
( 73 )
2. m for all kinds of animals and living
creatures, except the elephant.
Also for chairs, tables, coats, trousers, shirts,
pens and cigars.
Examples
JJ1 flQ^ ra two horses.
Ik ra V\m a table.
3. lu for round and hollow objects, ^.gi—
bottles, plates, fruit, hats, pillows,
and lamps. ( unlighted ).
Example ^T] iu lu. ten bottles.
4. msJ for thin, flat, or pointed objects e.g.
books, knives, forks, pins, needles
and nails.
Example w\ Ivitt) LfiJJ ViU^ a large knife.
5. ilJ0 for small objects, such as grains of
sand, seeds, pills, or precious stones.
Example ivm ?il3J LJJ^ three diamonds.
6. f^ for lumps or pieces of anything.
Example In mn f^m TIBU two lumps of sugar.
7. ^ for things generally, not specially
classified.
( 74 )
A safe guide to the beginner is "when in
doubt, say mi " but never use aii for persons or
animals.
The following designatory particles are used
for the special objects mentioned.
The Student is advised to learn these
gradually.
8. Jffi. for Kings, Princes, and images of
Buddha.
9. Jll ,, Buddhist priests.
10. l?iU ,, ropes, strings, threads, wire,
11. m ., trees, posts, columns.
12. IMD ,, elephants.
13. Tian ,, flowers, fireworks, and keys.
14. &] ,, boats, ships, & logs of timber
15. mz ,, stars, lights, lighted lamps.
16. PIU ,, vehicles and umbrellas.
17. m^ ,, buildings.
18. fm ,] tramway and railway lines, chains
or bracelets.
19. ']^ ,, ring shaped objects, military
bands, and orchestras.
( 75 )
20. iLtm ,, flat objects such as sheets of
paper, or iron.
21. tm , , flat pieces of cloth of a definite
size and shape such as panungs,
handkerchiefs, table cloths, bed
sheets, and napkins.
22. m „ piece goods.
23. vm ,, fruits and balls.
24. m ,, fruits (High word).
25. IJIJIJ ,, documents and manuscripts.
v\mm m^ ifiu two books.
Note. ^ ^
v\mfm m^ WH two letters.
26. vatwm ,, guns, tubes, water pipes.
27. imu „ clocks and watches.
28. R ,, pairs.
Example m^ \Jn ?i!]^ PI Two pairs of shoes.
29. lIlJ ,, tins of kerosene oil.
30. VI0 ,, parcels, bundles, packets.
31. aim „ eggs (High word).
( 76 )
32. imi ,, sets of things, suits of clothes.
33. 1J1U , , windows and doors.
34. I ,, teeth.
35. !Dn ,, bones, ribs.
36. LLW ,, pencils.
37. im ,, rolls of paper or cloth.
There are several others, but they are of
extreme rarity.
Very often the noun itself can be repeated
as a designatory particle.
Example. IJIU f\m llIU ' ' Two houses," can be
used instead of the strictly correct, WiU SQ^ W^.
Vocabulary 2.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS BEING
CAREFUL TO REMEMBER THE DESIGNATORY
PARTICLE IN THE CASE OF EACH NOUN.
m knife
im fork
WU spoon
am
cat
table
chair
PI
cupboard
K.\.nm lamp
r 77 )
mf
cigar
^u
gun
'^m\iA
matches
to
door
til ma
sugar
m mvi
window
iffl
boat, ship
to buy
iraliiJ
steamship
•31^
to sell
m
carriage
vn
to look for
m S 'aiu
man
11
to stare at
m tj viSjvi
women
ra^ m?
to want
un
very
mm m to want
m f]^ tramway, tramcar mu beautiful (persons)
ralvJ railway, train m beautiful (things)
Ivil vll electric light in umbrella
linn ni pen l!j Lvin walking stick
Exercise 28.
Read and Translate into English.
1 uvi? aflvi ^u m
II II
m
'OH aiEj m vn m
11
JO)
( 78 )
6 111 vn LLjjg m m i^m m
' T/IJU !!1Q Lfll ,0 Vin m
8 irimfi Qu'flviu
11
9 mj 0mn \
10 liifi'i^ uiuulviajun
11 i?i !j ^ntj Piu iTu LSI u fipi mu v\m
11 11
12 !j vifli^ mvi m m t iJin m ™ t^^ fia^ m
11 M
13 i/iTu t IpI:; Ivioj ra viu^ r|]
14 131 i^fa^ m? im m^ \.m
15 LJ1 "m uu i nKuan
16 <m "Ml m m m m\ m
17 ^ ifalvJmlviQjmj
11 s
18 u v^^ mjj m u Ijj fiQEJ un
19 III Iq dajj LHi Lfi3J im i?i:;Lnti^ lu viw
20 m nm m m uu m lu in 30^ ti'tu
( 79 )
Exercise 29.
Translate into Siamese.
1 I have a large table.
2 He has a small cat.
3 We have two chairs.
4 You have three spoons.
5 I see a beautiful cat.
6 We see five steamships.
7 Look at those three men.
8 We buy sugar.
9 I want a cupboard.
10 We want eight cigars.
11 Where are the matches.
12 Do you want a carriage.
13 That girl is not beautiful.
14 Go and look for those two pens.
15 My gun is in that cupboard.
16 He sells knives and forks.
17 I want to buy three horses.
18 They want to sell their carriage.
19 Those two men have no matches.
20 We want four lamps.
( 80 ;
Chapter XIV
The Verb.
The verb in . Siamese has no inflections for
person, number, tense, mood or voice.
Person and number are expressed by the pro-
noun (if used).
Tenses are expressed by certain words which
are added to the verb.
Example iWU "to write,"
Present Tense mj iWU I write.
Continuous Present m TITO L31IU Q?J I am
writing.
Future Tense ^u ^z if LIU I shall or will write.
Preterite Tense mi ll^'^iaLJU I wrote.
Perfect Tense mi IWU IIW I have written.
The Imperfect may be thus expressed lSq mi
riTO L311U W I was writing.
The Fluperject may be thus expressed,
\.m milpfL^UU \m I had written.
The Imperative is expressed by usin^ the
simple verb word often followed by such mter-
jections as \,W\. 5.
tii^i iJj:;i?i \m shut the door.
Examples
JJT U f come here.
( 81 )
Auxiliary verbs.— In addition to the words
above mentioned, there are certain important
auxiliaries viz :—
Can is expressed by m after the verb
word.
Example mi 111 m I can go.
N.B. Distinguish carefully between,
mjllJll^'' I can go.
mi m'^llJ I went. (Preterite Tense.)
Must is expressed by Jm^ e.g. mi llQ^llJ
I must go.
Ought to is expressed by the words PIQ? S«
e.g. mj m? s^IlI I ought to go. mj mi '^t "V^ liJ
I ought to have gone.
May, Might (Subjunctive) is expressed by
the word m at the beginning of a sentence.
e. g. 1m mi 111 "May I go or let me go,"
In polite speech the word "M would be added.
<'. g. aa Im mi 111 " Please let me go."
The word m has the following idiomatic
uses,
( 82 )
1. In such a sentence as ' Tell him to go '
the Siamese idiom is "Tell him let him go;"
2. ivi sometimes means to order or to
make to do, as mi "^zlvi mullJ lilU "I will
make you go home."
3. In combination with the words L01 . . un, m
means ' ' to give. "
Lai ill mti 111 Imw " Give me the sugar."
The Passive Voice can be very rarely ex-
pressed in Siamese, the active voice is almost
always used, but there are a few phrases in
which the word vm occurs, which have a passive
sense, ''. g. m vm l4w LLff] "I have been beaten."
Here the word fin gives the passive meaning in
the sense of I have caught or attained to a
beating, (tin properly means to touch.)
Ru/<' /or Tramlatluv.. — Sentences in English
in which the passive voice is used, should always
be changed so as to use the active voice before
translatmg them into Siamese.
( 83 )
The verb Lllu *to be' is usually omitted where
it would be employed in Engish, e.g. m PTQ U^IQ^'tlli
"this is my horse, "lit." horse animal this mine."
The Siamese never say m m U Lllu 'am mi. The
verb Lllu is retained in such sentences as
■ail Lllu Flli wnqy " I am an Englishman," where
it is used with a noun, or an adjective equivalent
to a noun. It is omitted when used with a
Predicative adjective.
''■g. mi l4u " I am ill," never mi Lllu L'^U.
When a specific disease is mentioned, the
Siamese say Lllu (to be), whereas the verb " to
have " is always used in English in such cases.
e.g. mi LlJu la "I have fever," lit. " I am
fever."
In sentences where the verb ' to be ' is used
in the sense of to live or to be situated, the
Siamese use the verb W instead of Lllu.
e. g. mm "M^ mmt\m " where is my
book?"
vinu ad ^IviU "where do you live." lit.
you is where ?
( 84 )
The verb U (to have) is used impersonally at
the beginning of a sentence to mean ' there is *
or 'there are.'
>'. (t. t mm^ m uul^lt '^m \m. There are two
books on that table.
Compound Verbs. — Many verbs in Siamese
are compounded of two or more separate words
which do not necessarily follow one another in
the sentence. The following common verbs are
of this nature. The student should learn them
carefully and notice that the object is placed
between the component parts.
1. LQT 3jn to bring.
f-ij. LQIuraui "bring the cigars."
2. 101 inlw^ to give.
^.{h LQI vm in \v\'m ' ' give me the cigars. "
3. LQ1 .If or mi VA to put down.
e.g. LQ1 UW Ig*" uulpi:; " put the cigars down
on the table."
4. mi .Ill to take.
e.g. LQ1 UVllllJ f lHu " take the cigars
home."
5. LSI Ill L^U to. take away.
( 85 )
^'.g. \.mm\m\vX'^\m " take these cigars
away."
e.g. m 20^ LVldn ulll iflU " send these things
home."
7. LBT .l?i to put.
<'.g. miljralfiluMlJ "put the cigars in
the box."
8. LflU W to collect or put away.
e.g. mu viu^ia LVidiul'f IupT -'put these
books away in the cupboard."
9. LQH W to distribute, to give out.
e.g. vm mm \m\ u Ivi tan m ^t f^m im
"give them each two of these books."
10. LQI a&n to take out,
e.g. L01 mm LVldl u aan sin MU "take these
books out of the box."
In other cases the component words of the
verb are not separated, e.g. Jfl^ w^ ' to cry,' ^^ liJ
' to fall down.'
e.g. m\ Mm mm m "do not cry loudly,"
iK fl^lll tm " the water falls to the
ground."
( 86 )
There are certain words which can be added
to verbs to give a different shade of meaning.
A few common examples are subjoined.
li^J gives the idea of 'thoroughness, completion. '
^^ gives the idea of ' down, ' or ' decreasing in
strength. '
lu gives the idea of * up, ' or ' increasing in
strength. '
^ gives the idea of fixity, stability.
idu gives the idea of aimlessness, pleasure.
IT\ gives the idea of motion into,
WU gives the idea of motion out.
s^ indicates a polite imperative.
TO is used with the future tense to give em-
phasis.
Verbs of speaking, thinking, calling and
hoping take the word h ( to say ) after them.
'^.fj. uu m 11 [jc 14 Lu ra mz i\m 'tju I thmk
that this is not my table.
Most verbs of motion from are often com-
pounded with the verb 111 ( to go ) and verbs of
motion towards are compounded with the verb
JJ1 ( to come )
Note i.— The idiomatic use of llJ m used to-
gether to give a perfect tense meaning.
( 87 )
e.g. VllullJlviU JJI "where have you been?"
lit. "you go where come"
Note ii.— LJJ Lllu is often used instead of
ili M ( cannot ) of bodily actions.
e.g. mirailllji LlJu "I cannot swim", is
often said instead of mi m m\\\7\
Vocabulary 3.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
\.m liJ
to walk
i^ (III)
to run
du
mt\
to swim
vm
6fl
to hold, to carry
TO
mu
to learn
\.m
aau
to teach
'MW
to rise
A
^
UBU
to sleep, to lie
down
m
m
to think
xm
m
u
to speak
ran
llfjfl
to call
to sit
to stand
to fear
to help
to play
to like
to beat
to do, to make
to ask
to answer
vt\'^ to understand
( 88 )
Exercise 30.
Read and Translate into English.
1. mi s:; la i\m m m m^
2.
mL^uliliHu
3.
L!aT=5:; QviliJiliu
4.
Ltan '^t w m lu
5.
in "^t 'im 121
1 %j 1
6. vnu "^ m^ m? wu vn \.m
7. vi'nu Vain jH aao ifiiu vta
8. m ^u im m unu
9. mi amn still uau
10 inu ^u ?ia^ nj^uari u I'f lu (n*"
J.W. jl
11. Lai Lma jji Iw'mi m v[m
12. ™ m LJEJfi Piu uu Lm 3J1
13. Lai viiwia Ldjjulij l^li
14. L31 WW sau 'mi im u
15. Lfl U^ m ¥" LLOT
16 Lai ?n ill pi ui m3j m
XV. jj
( 89 )
Exercise 31.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. We will go home.
2. Bring me three chairs.
3. Give him a pen.
4. Put the table in the house.
5. They will sleep on the table.
6. He cannot swim.
7. They have run home.
8. I bought a horse.
9. You must sell your horse.
10. Let me go to sleep.
11. Put those books on the chair.
12. He will buy four tables.
13. He sat in that chair.
14. I helped him.
15. Where did you see me ?
16. Where have they been ?
Exercise 32.
Read and Translate into English.
1. m )mm ^?nii In m m m lu
2. mi m Qi L!3n "^^Ijj m m. u
( 90 )
5. mi Qiu vwmfi im u mu m \.\m
6. IT] Viltjn Iw'viiu in vi^^iu m aw m l?i lii
\m yiiu JJ1
Exercise 33.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. He says that we shall have six knives .
2. We think that he has seen us.
3. They made four chairs and two tables.
4. I am holding a pen and a spoon.
5. Do you want a black horse ?
6. They will call a carriage for us.
Chapter XV.
THE ADJECTIVE.
Adjectives in Siamese follow the noun
which they qualify, but there are a few ad-
jective of Pall origm which precede the noun.
e.p. mi great .
( 91 )
Adjectives may be :—
1. Simple, r.g. ^ gOod. pfl black.
2. Doiihh . ('.(J. ^ ritj savage. W \k\ stupid.
3. />f<r^■^Ja^^/ v.— Derivative adjectives may be
formed from nouns and verbs by means
of such words as W and !D^ 'which'
m 'thing' ih 'face' or front.
^.g. t m lovable. ^ nu eatable, m nm
fearful. HU f w^a remaining.
Some adjectives are formed with the phrase
111 f (do not know.)
«.'/. Ijjj Qlimy 'eternal,' lit. do not know
11
day to die.
Note these three phrases : —
LlIu 0U 3Jin plentiful, many.
LlluaUBIl^ absolutely.
IlIu ITiU chiefly, important.
Possessive Adjectives. — These are formed by add-
ing the word W^ (of or belonging to) to pronouns.
''.ff. -iJU I. 110^ mi my, mine.
( 92 )
Note. — When a possessive adjective is used
with another adjective, the possessive adjective
comes last.
e.g. VC\ m "M^ m my black horse.
Demonstrative Adjectives are: —
U this, these, m that, those. Imi that
those yonder.
There is no definite article ' the ' in Siamese,
but its place is taken by the demonstrative ad-
jectives U and m.
Comparison of ylr//V>^*;i/;«^^.— The comparative
degree is formed by adding rrJl to the positive.
<',g. ^ good. 71 trJl better.
The superlative degree is usually formed by
adding the words l\ m- to the positive.
e,g. f\ good ^ rril better. f[tfm best.
There are various other words which may
be used to form the superlative degree, e.g. jjlfl
or un 'very.' 7\ JJIfl or ^ llfl very good.
it \M\1 and iVmi Lnil are strong forms.
t\ MMn excellent, J\ LMfiBinu exceedingly good.
A superlative meaning is given to adjectives
by repeating, them thus, 71 71 usually written
^«^ ' very good.' ^13J *] ' very beautiful.'
Cf. M"^ ' very ' e.g. 3J1 m UU UW ILvT'^
that horse is very dear.
( 93 )
Vocabulary 4.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
irii
LLti
•01
mi
\.m
long
L!JU
cool
short
mi\
cold
tall
m
fresh
short (of persons)
Pill
unripe
happy
m
sharp
good-natured
m
blunt, stupid.
sad
hard
many
mi
soft
new
h
large
old, of things
vm
young
old, of persons
m
ill
quick
mm
well, healthy
slow
m
loud
hot
m
quiet
at all
t
to-morrow
( 94 )
Exercise 34.
Read and Translate into English.
1. 'iu u mi'i inn
3. .lai mmi \m m Ivi w. im v\m
4. ifa f\m m u Lm riQi im w^ vn'u
5. In L^ m mi t m lto miu m
!J
„ ^ U ^ H ^
6. gun 'Qu m?iui^
7. Ln '^:; liJ la ^u Iviu' ?im nj:;ijan
8. ^aauLvimui] Lfn uli^
9. f^u wmm mu h inn
10. LjT^l^Tuu mlH Lfuau iJim
11. mj LLn n(n vn'u
12. inu L^n !flQ^ TflTU QIJ ^Iviu
13. mvniundi m
?
14. LiuTmaaniiiQii^O
15. ui?i ?ia^ Lfiu u Rjj fi mm
II
?
I A A
( 95 )
16. jji Ivioj m LUJQ ranu im
17. 'QuiLmQ'lviqj wmEJWi
18. in iw m Im
19. L-ailiJ t m im
20. L5n m m iw Ivioj lliJi^ m
Exercise 35.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. That man is very old.
2. That house is very large.
3. I want a sharp knife.
4. Do not speak loud.
5. There are many black cats in that house.
6. He is very happy to-day.
7. Bring me three new books.
8. I will sell this old horse.
9. Those three children are stupid.
10. Tom is a good natured man.
11. My cat is smaller than yours.
12. It is very hot to-day.
] 3. That man is very tall.
( 96 )
14. This boy is not younger than you.
15. That horse is larger than this.
16. We shall be ill to-morrow.
17. To-day they will buy a new house.
18. Take away this unripe fruit.
Chapter XVI.
THE PRONOUNS.
I. Personal Fro/uxuti^.— Great care must be
taken in the use of the personal pronouns, as
different forms are used according to the rel-
ative rank of the person speaking, the person
spoken to, and the person spoken about. Offence
can be given or taken very readily if a pronoun
unsuited to the rank of the person be used.
PRONOUNS OF THE FIRST PERSON. /.
1. n A highly abusive and a con-
temptuous word used to inferiors.
2. 31 As above but not so abusive.
3. 'till The general form used to
equals and inferiors.
4. Tmi'^ A polite or official form used
principally in official letters. It
can be used in speaking to
superiors.
( 97 )
5. w Used by inferiors to superiors;
a very polite form. Most Siamese
when talking together use
W rather than mi
6. ni':;CJJJ As above, only still more
polite.
mzmw or !
^ , Used in speaking to Princes.
T\ VIJ:;wvislsi Used in speaking to H. M.
the King of Siam.
9. TOU A polite form used by wo-
men, e.g. a servant to her
mistress.
10. m "We," but it is familiar.
More formal expressions for
" we " are such phrases as
PRONOUNS OF THE SECOND PERSON. YOU.
1. m A very abusive and contemptuous
word used to inferiors.
2. IW Rather contemptuous sometimes,
but is the usual form to employ to
a coolie. Parents speakmg to
their children use this word.
( 98 )
3. L'=^1 or Lin Used to servants and inferiors.
4. n'TU The general term to equals, but
is rather familiar.
5. Fitii To superiors. To high officials the
' word is used as follows. To a
man of the rank of Luang,
Piru Vim^. To a man of the rank of
Phra, PimiAlJ". To a man of the
rank of Phya or Chow Phya,
w f=im.
T
6. im used by persons of high rank to
each other.
7. EJllAIJ^inifl To Royal Princes.
8. Ill m naaon yJKinYlTo H. M. The King
of Siam.
9. mm a term of endearment used to
women.
\()f<'.- In speaking to superiors, or to
equals in a formal way, when no intimacy exists
between the parties concerned ; the Siamese
employ a kind of impersonal method to obviate
the use of such words as 1*^1 or i/iiu.
( 99 )
The name or title of the person spoken to
is used instead of the pronoun.
('. (J. \s\m. '^x, vm m m\ AVill you come
back ? speaking to a Phya.
\m 3J1 mim ' Where do you come from' ?
speaking to a ordinary person. in^==Mr,
PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON.
HE, SHE, IT, THEY.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
un
4. im
vm
In
fijjj
u
wLim
It, referring to animals or
children. It is abusive if used
to refer to persons.
Referring to inferiors.
The general form referring
to equals.
Referring to superiors. Be
careful not to confuse the use
of this word as a second per-
sonal pronoun with its use as
a pronoun of the third person.
Referring to superiors.
Referring to princes.
Referring to a Royal Prince.
Referring to the H. M. the
King of Siam.
Referring to Royalty generally.
( 100)
ii, A;.s.s7>v//v' Protunui^ have the same form
as the possessive adjectives '/./•. but are
used as follows.
Adjective !j1 2Q-3 'Su ' my horse. '
Pronoun |jl m U 20^ ^U ' This horse is mine'.
iii. RrliiUri' Pronouns :ji and 1]^ "who, wMch,
t\isX" ('.(J. ^tm^mmUM The horse
which I bought.
iv. Ut'fic.rln; Proi/oiiii.<: are formed from
personal pronouns by the addition of
the word \m >'■ g. utl LQ^ myself, m m
m itself etc. 'mjli^'^i.sfjij mnm 'mi u m
"I wrote this letter myself."
V. Ijtl<'rr<)ij((tin' Pronoaiis
m vulgarly pronounced m who ?
9^1? what ?
U V\m U \\ whoever ?
u
n how many ? N.B. n m what is the
time ?
iwXl how much ?
m which ?
vi. Indf'tivrte Prononns .
%!
Ul^ some, any. a:;lj any, anything.
llJ lilpl? nobody. 121 they, one, cf. French
on.
( 101 )
Tin f=lU eV-erybody. m m^ both.
a a ay a
mwm, my\m, m'^u all. m every, au
other, p^^^ *] various. T/in i^ each, every.
Vocabulary 5.
READ AND LEARN THESE WORDS.
nu
Ltan
anvn?
tim
name
to eat
rice
food
cup
mi\m^ glass
fiji^nuiri to drink
ifl'Dn tea
lljtlTlfl country
town
frmn climate
riu shop
L^Qsl
wm
market
m
word
fiw
theatre
cloth
SU
poor
lULI
butter
LLW
dear
cheap
m
11
pig
ra<i
room
.n
hen
^ 1
b
egg
( 102 )
day
m
head
Jqu
month
m
eye
year
ear
f]imii
week
husband
mif]
hat
im
wife
mu
garden
m
tosay, to report
hand
nm
price
Exercise 36.
Read and Translate into English.
1. gu u fi m m f\ m
2. ej3jl3JiQ"l?nl!
4.
S^lillm L?gf
5.
im m m m m u
6.
LSI t mn n m
7. mff^ ?ia^piu Lsu 3jin
8. vm Lira lu "uu jipin lvitIj
( 103 )
9. IraLilumaQNiSvinj^Piuuu
10. S^lijlra^ wmin
11. EJjj'^"jJivnf=imw^mv!u
12. PlUVlUUmLViUmLiULLe^Q
13. mtainlslfi LLWun
14. u viusitjl[?i'^:;ui
15. L3J3J TOYlSt^DQ mmMM
16. Laiun(?n^ jjilvimiui^
17. piu vin •] m'siaij™!!
19. m EJ "DILI i^ L^u '^w m
20. Ltaira^liJ^m]
21. m m w. im l^u nihh
22. L!ai #0 Qi L^n Finifi lTu unn
23. vinuliJlQviugnliJviu^
24. L'^^ m^ LQ1 aivnj jji I m^ u
( 104 )
Exercise 37.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Have you any eggs ? 2. Everybody will
drink tea. 3. The man w^hom I saw was old.
4. Shall you go home this year ? 5. Who saw
me to-day ? 6. In this country the climate is
bad. 7. Go and buy some different glasses.
8. We must sleep every day. 9. What have you
there ? 10. Have you been to market ? 11. How
much is this cup ? 12. They will go to the shop.
13. Whoever will go ? 14. I walk every day in
my garden. 15. How many hens have you ?
16. Do not buy that cloth. 17. Nobody likes
pigs. 18. My wife has no butter. 19. Both
those cats are large. 20. Her husband is poor.
21, All my horses are ill. 22, Come and have a
drink. 23. I went to the new shop myself.
24. These eggs are not cheap.
Chapter XVH.
THE ADVERB.
Adverbs can be formed from adjectives by
the aid of such words as \m, LlJu, iv\.
( 105 )
Examples. L2n f^ 111 l^lfJ Ifi ' *he runs quickly. "
rofl lifl I'w'^iQIl?) "wash the clothes clean."
The Adjective itself can be used as an
adverb if placed after the verb.
''.g. IT\ T^ fi he runs well.
As a general rule, adverbs come either at
the end or the beginning of a sentence.
'''^ im W llJ mu when I go home.
mj tlJ inii iim =] I often go home.
The student should learn the following com-
mon adverbs and adverbial phrases.
I.— ADVERBS OF TIME.
mil
to-day
yesterday
■ mm u
Qlli f U U the day before j mm \h
1
yesterday
to-morrow
the day after
mm u'l
iliii
to-morrow u nm£J U
now
'^It \MIl presently
mD vm afterwards
at once
now
next week
next month
next year
last year
mm T\m U last month
Qn^l^Llri'QUll last week
m
u
in future
( 106 )
A a . .
LUQ Kr\ just now
I X ij to-morrow
f morning
lSq mUQIUU yesterday
m
?
evenmg
PIU m ?^ all night long
I
all day long
always
'iu m P11
L^3J0
0n, an ^MW again
muM
then
every day
late at night
ever, usually
how old
sometimes
often
never
this evening
im fin JJ gu 3J1 img 3 days ago
muu
Vin TU every day an f\m mugu in two or
\ ^ ^ , three days
m iT\ U this morning I time
A A ^
L3J0 when. L3J0 b when ? (interrogative. )
II. -ADVERBS OF PLACE.
1\ im
A A
Ay.
2>
MM
where
whence
here
there
yonder
ra m u
tan m
hence
up and down
back
near
far
( 107 )
Pl?^ fill am opposite
at home
from home
^ mu '^n ^ anywhere
Sin inu
'm uan
over
under
underneath
inside
outside
w\
llJ
in front
behind
straight on
JQUjBQJiJQLI around
"m sQi
on the right
on the left
elsewhere
lliW^lviU nowhere
Tin *] UVi^ everywhere.
1/ u
«i A
1/1 QU
III.— ADVERBS OF MANNER etc
lAIQ
LTlll?, nuinuQEJ howmuch?
THI lu why ?
BLn^l? how
TO U,l7l^llu therefore
adiJLranu of the same
, A ^^^"^
0^1^ Qli of another
kind
am-jlviU what kind ?
Lnau
iJr3Jim
LTnfm
iJiunfii^
LLT/IU
enough
almost
about
equally
especially
medium
nearly
( 108 )
tin
V
correctly
m wrongly
LJQ, Im ill quickly
m
mm fm
mi m
•a JJ1
un,
slowly
together
on foot
on horseback
very
uin much
JJin inu 111 too much
um little
uaii mu 111 too little
LIR only
LHU Wl more than
Lm, Lllu LLU truly
'nmrnvm is that so
Exercise 38.
Read and Translate into English.
1. lyi^nuLnaij
2. {nu-aQ^muQ^lrifiinuaa^mj
li
3. uTu "sm L^n m m^ m fiw m mu iim i/n'u
u
4. ^U QLI 1] UTU Tin QU
u f
5. m mmu 'nm mmfm
6. mu ui ^ !l i^ilu
7. fi Lmg 5ra 31li i Iviu
( 109 )
8. mi 111 m w In m^ m^ w.
9. m u 21U f\m m & m t m
SI L
10. fi FlU BLj ^ LUBvl m toioi wu m
11- 'tlU'^"2miLllTlL3JQ^UU
12. ^uy i4nmfiLL?iui?i w
18. M^^miTuwiupilviu
14. mjjiu^ L^Q^lne^un
15. ]}jtm m x).)! inu
16. Laimm?|j&im
17. vi'iu im fixi auy r]]
18. m 14 Yi'iu rfa^ aiu in m iim vi'nu
19. liJ 1J1U mw M Ifi "]
20. mu '^^ lijj asl? m v(]
21. Qnfffi 141 L!ai '^^ nmi in
22. L^u i Ljnlii fi wu
23. V11U uQulu iHu u ija^j =] r[]
24. L71 u -au li m? vn liJu qu jjih
( no )
Exercise 39.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Where have you come from ? 2. Let us go
home the day after to-morrow. 3. That child
eats all day long. 4. Presently they will return.
5. Go to market at once. 6. Last year I was
very ill. 7. Do not go out too late at night.
8. Sometime we go for a drive in the evening.
9. We see these things everywhere. 10. Call
that man sitting yonder. 11. There is too much
sugar in the tea. 12. What kind of box do you.
want ? 13. Why do you drink that water ? 14.
They have not had enough to eat. 15. Tom and
I came together. 16. I want miore money than
this 17. These two glasses are equal. 18. The
garden is in front of the house. 19. They are
walking behind the house. 20. This is nearly
correct. 21. My house is opposite to yours. 22.
We have almost reached home. 23. The book
is underneath the table. 24. He says he has
never seen a tiger.
( 111 )
Chapter XVIII.
PREPOSITIONS CONJUNCTIONS
INTERJECTIONS.
The Prepositions in Siamese are : —
in
at, to,
^u ™
until
h
extending to
mw\
through
\
in
^^m
since
m, '^^X\ from
'him
in order to
Lifl
to (dative)
fnj, mu
with
m
on
m 3J
without
,P1
under
mm '^K\
except
\n
before, (place)
m}i
according to
vm
,, (time)
mJiawil because
f
vm
behind
LLT/IU
instead of
lumi^ between
f JJ near by the side of
The Conjunctions i
/ HiaiiieHi
are : —
im,
Lm:;, nil and
m
but
m^,mw!]ufnjalso
™ Qtll^l? n ^ however
WQ
or
Lwx "auu
therefore
ah
( 112 )
and then fulfil, m^ once upon a time
±J V U ' . „
•^i
then
nw besides
Common IiUfrjccthiuf iit Siaiticsi' are :-
\vm ! 4l !
calling attention
nil \m ! L^i vm \
m\t ! LL14 !
f
QLI ! aU ! QILI
? u
Lmu !
\.m !
^ LLfig ! m !
indicating
surprise
indicating
pain
>>
disgust
>i
joy
! f
sorrow
> J
consent
Vocabulary 6.
LEARN THESE WORDS
lW\ time ; igftT \.Y\m midday
nmnt^l'^gu in the daytime LQft1 Ul 1^ dawn
LQmn^^l^^U in the night ^ tgfn lAlfill
1 L^fii ui m
dusk
( 113 )
w
agreement
to order
T^VilJ
soldier
1
business
nm m
army
iitmii
cocoanut
%u
soil, land
mm
mango
mm
sea
mi\A
clean
U3JU1
river
m]\m
dirty-
TOQ^
canal
i^un
wet
nm
11
mountain
LLW
dry
vigi'j L-ai
valley-
Ifinfj
the earth
?
fertile
^j:;!n^i?i[j
the sun
mu
fat
yiK^m
the moon
Wli
thin
mi
star
UQfl
to tell
711^
path way
vnEjliJ im
to be lost
urgent
vijju mu
1
to go round
to revolve
( 114 )
Exercise 40.
READ AND TRANSLATE INTO ENGLISH.
1. uiluLL3Jui f^niJjn jjin
a-- I £=.
3. ntai liu 0^ iJi TCLfi
u li
5. mil lu na^ ffvi uu uw m
6. LQ1 LfiJ mill an 131 unvi v\m
7. m inu fiij mj
8. uan -^in Piu uu I3J fi Ira jji
9. mil fi LLjjg ^Q^ m vifa lii (?ig viu^
10. mw m n ^ig imm m
11. m Mui mi 5
12. mj fi iim ?n3j i?fQ llpi ra v\m mu\]l im \.im
13. mu sf^ ! lii m \m iim inuliJ
14. mis ! 1^1 aiii^ iTu A
1
1.5. Q^ BU mi L^ii mVi
? ?
1
6. TllU '^1 ! !!!!] l\Zm 1m mJ ?i1U m
( 115 )
17. LBnf^UUulvi JJl W^U
18. 131^ m miu m mm n ti miu m mu imm m
ii>. m mil vn mu fi'ilii
20. LW?X WJ t Sr SHLlJu
Exercise 41.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. There are four cocoanuts on the table. 2, I
have been well since last year. 3. I live near the
river. 4. The Earth goes round the sun. 5. One
book is under the table. 6. The moon is smaller
than the Earth. 7. There are four men in that
house. 8. This valley is very fertile. 9. There
is a valley between those mountains. 10. The
soldiers marched through the country. 11 I
will come instead of you. 12. The army has
reached the sea. 13. My books are at home,
14. This is not according to your agreement.
15, I came before he did. 16. The soil near the
canal is wet.
( 116 )
Chapter XIX.
TIME. MONEY, WEIGHTS AND
MEASURES.
Time. — The Siamese method of reckoning-
the hours of the day is as follows. They start
from sunrise (6 a.m.) and count six hours till
noon : —
Thus sunrise (6 a.m.) is VW\ U\h
7 a.m.
8 a.m.
mm <mh\^ Lm
9 a.m.
iT(] mi m
10 a.m.
i^m^im m
11 a.m.
vm w^m LiH
12 noon.
\.T(] mm
From noon onwards, they count six hours
till sunset (6 p.m.) as follows.
1 p.m.
vm \m\m
2 p.m.
\jm im m^ \m
3 p.m.
\.imimm{\m
4 p.m.
\.imimt\m
( 117 )
5 p.m.
6 p.m.
From 6 p.m to 6 a.m. they reckon 12 hours
called m
mi iji^ villus or m
1m iim
•1 d
LOT vifi im mu or LOT
m]} or i<]m m m
Thus 7 p.m-
LQfil m v\w
8 p.m.
LQon m^ m etc.
up to 5 a.m.
LQ01 m LH^ TO
1
The night is also divided into watches called
!jn3J
Thus 9 p.m. is often called LOT um v\m
Midnight LQfn m^ mjJ
3 a.m. Li^m mii L11JJ
Since the introduction of European clocks
many Siamese call the_ hours by the same num-
bers as is done in English.
For the fractional parts of the hour the
following expressions are used.
( 118 )
(i.) For the half hour, the word m ' half ' is
added.
r.ff. 2-30 p.m. ™i UltJ ?i9^ Ijj^ ra
(ii. ) For periods of less than half an hour, they
say so many hours and minutes.
r.ff. 2-15 p.m. Lim 3J1^?iQ<ll3J^^U vilUI^
(iii.) For periods of more than half an hour,
they reckon it as the next hour less so
many minutes.
(^.(/. 2-4.3 p. m. i']^i iiit] fiijj Ijj^ !j^ Til fi iu m
mfi or nfii mu ^iii \m m
•aipi ail vii my\
The Siamese language has adopted the
English word minute 2u(^ which is often used
^
instead of the word UITI. A second of time is
A
gunvi.
Formerly the hour was divided into 6 parts
of 10 minutes each, called uivi, but this is no
longer used.
T/ie Month is reckoned in two ways.
(i.) The Official .^tjilc, in which the months
correspond to those of the Gregorian calender ;
the name being taken from the signs of the Zodiac.
(119)
January.
jjnjif=iJj
July.
riiTigra
February.
nummis
August.
awn™
March.
flUIRJi
September.
mnm
April.
Ljjmtju
October.
T
May.
wqam^jj
November.
wrjFismLiu
June.
December.
wTim
(ii.) The Popular Lunar reckoning. Each
month has 29 or 30 days alternately.
These months are numbered from 1 to 12,
but the first month is called LinQU QIEJ and the
second imu U, Every 3 years a 13th month has
to be intercalated ; the eighth month mau LLlJpi
is reckoned twice over.
These lunar months are usually one month
in advance of the ordinary calendar months i. e.
the second month imu U is somewhere about
January.
Each of these lunar months is divided into
two parts, (i) The waxing of the Moon, from
new to full. {"SU) (ii.) The waning of the Moon,
( 120 )
from full to new mil) Each day is called m.
Thus the fourth day of the waning moon of the
5th month would be Lmu h LLJ3J t m . The ^U mt
or Siamese holy days always occur on the 1st 9th
15th of the waning and 8th of the waxing, or
else on the 8th and 15th of the waxing and the
8th and 15th of the waning in alternate months.
The common people invariably use this
made of reckoning. In order to find out the cor-
responding day in the Gregorian calendar, the
best way is to purchase a Siamese almanac
(llpUW) costing 1 salung.
In these almanacs the days of the month,
Gregorian or Official system, are put in* parallel
columns with the Lunar reckoning thus.
This rather cabalistic ar-
rangement of figures requires
some explanation. The Left
hand column is simply the days
of the month (Official reckon-
ing.)
February.
?
A
SI
+ Snoi
Iffl
bToi
01
&10
d 1 en
(121 )
The right hand column refers to the lunar
reckoning. The sign i means the waxing or
waning of the moon and the numeral above or
below it the number of the m or day. When
the numeral is over the sign °i it means waxing
(2> S \
i'Sl^'SU) ) when the numeral is under the
sign 1 it signifies waning moon can^LLJJJ)
The numeral on the right hand side of .1 is
the number of the lunar month, and the numeral
on the left hand side of 1 indicates the day of the
week 51 being Sunday la Monday and so forth.
The mark + against the left hand numeral indi-
cates 'm Wt (Siamese holy day. )
Therefore the first line of the above calendar
corresponding to Feb. 1st will be Thursday Wan
Pra the eight day of the waxing moon of the
3rd month.
The days of the week are :
s'
Sunday gu Trnm
•u e'
Monday lU "^UTO
Tuesday oii mmi
Wednesday m m\
Thursday 'III Vii:\mm
(122)
Friday QU Pinf
Saturday gii ifJlf
Siamese holy day oil mz
It is an interesting fact to notice that the
names of the days in Siamese are practically the
same as the names in any European language
the days being called after the planets in the
order, Sun, Moon, Mars, Mercury, Jupiter, Venus,
Saturn. Thus gu nmm means literally Sunday.
THE YEAR.
There are three eras used in Siamese chro-
nology.
(i. ) The official era Ratinakosinsok J. F|. dat-
ing from the foundation of Bangkok A.D. 1782.
(ii) The old civil era ( Chulasakkarat ) dating
from A. D. 638.
(iii) The religions era (Puttasakkarat) dating
from the death of Buddha B, C. 543.
The official new year begins on April 1st.
The present year 1906 A. D. (April) is
equivalent to 125 Ratinakosinsok. 1268 Chula-
sakkarat or 2449 Puttasakkarat.
The popular method of reckoning years, is
by cycles of twelve, named after various animals
( 123)
The following
is the
popular cycle.
il 'im
year of the Rat.
11
>>
>> >>
Ox.
li im
>?
) J ))
Tiger.
u \mt
>>
) > >>
Rabbit.
\\ V^l^
>>
M M
Large Dragon
u V£:,\.m
M
>• )>
Small Dragon.
u Vitim
)>
> >»
Horse.
t U^LLII
>> )
> )>
Goat.
t ran
>> )
> > J
Monkey.
L j:;m
j> ?
J > )
Cock.
li -^Q
>j >
> )>
Dog.
u nnj
5> >
7 >>
Pig.
There is a small handbook published in
Siamese giving tables for reducing these popular
dates to official Ratinakosinsok dates, and from
thence it isquite easy to reduce the Siamese dates
to their Gregorian equivalents.
( 124 )
MONEY.
The Siamese money table is as follows :—
l?iT/}FI — 1 att 0^
— 1 pie Iw
=- 1 song pie or seek !iin
= 1 fuang mm
— 1 salung m^
— 1 tical 1J1Y1
-- 1 tamlung !^1^^
— 1 catty ^•J
The coins in circulation are -^ lot, att, pie,
and song pie. Bronze ; fuang, salung, and tical,
Silver.
The tamlung and the catty are merely sums
of money.
The silver coins are used as weights ; and
other weights are derived from them.
TABLE OF SIAMESE WEIGHTS.
5 lee ra = 1 hoon VIU
5 hoon — 1 fuang
2 f uangs == 1 salung etc. as money table
50 catties = 1 picul vnu = 133^^ lb.
2 lots
2
atts
2
pies
2
song pies
2
fuangs
4
salungs
4 ticals
!0
tamlungs
( 125 )
The tical is about 15 grains or ^ oz. and the
catty is about 2| lbs. Avoir. Besides the ' lee '
and 'hoon' which strictly speaking are Chinese
weights used for opium and gems, there are
several other small weights, but they are not
important.
Sums of money are thus denoted,
catties
tamlungs
salungs
d
ticals
fuangs
en
pies
(i)
(2)
Thus fig 2 would represent the sum of 5
catties 1 tamlung 2 ticals 3 salungs 1 f uang. 2 pies
or 406 ticals 60 atts.
To represent atts put the number in the
place for pies and with the word ^ after it.
Siamese Long Measure.
4 krabiet, T\lt\m = 1 Niw (inch) &
12 Niw. = 1 Kheub (span) m
1 Kheub, = 1 Sawk (cubit) Fian
( 126 )
4 Sawk,
= 1 Wah
'il
20 Wah.
= 1 Sen
:00 Sen,
1 Yote
IfJ'Qli
A ' Wah ' is practically 2 metres, or a little
over 2 yards. 40 sen are practically 1 mile.
Siamese Measure of Capacity for liquids and
Dry goods.
4 Kham meu. Til ua = (handful) = 1 tchang-
awn s^Qatj
2 tchangawn 1 tanan ViUTU (coconut
shell)
20 tanan = 1 tang !i^ (|pailful)
25 tanan = 1 sat W\ (bushel)
100 tang, or 80 sat = 1 coyan inxiU ( cart
load.)
A ' Tanan ' is nearly 1 litre or about 1 quart.
SqiKtrr iiu'dsiirc. For measurements of area,
the unit is the square wah. a square sen is
called a rai [j (acre.)
CiiJ)ir ivcuKiirc for sawn timber. The unit is
the yok m which is 16 wah long 1 sawk wide
and Iniw thick, 1 yok = 11-44 cubic feet
approximately.
(127)
Vocabulary 7.
ifB
boat.
m
comb.
viKmw
plank.
m mt
to laugh.
mu
road.
ilin
mouth.
BonqM
English.
m namely, for example
^Jl3LFlPi
French.
5^ ^
U1 JJU
oil.
lumim
German.
r ^ ^
kerosine oil.
^n
European.
nrmu
paper.
uiwm
clock.
mra
salt.
imm
clerk.
v^fn \m
pepper.
Lmgu
ring.
mn
chilies.
nfijj
round.
mnj^
accounts.
[.m
to be born.
inan
shoes, slippers
m llI^bh
paddy.
m^
opposite to,
equivalent to.
Exerci
READ AND TRANSLj
se 42.
^TE INTO ENGLISH.
1 i'im mu ?ii3J im mi t sr mn.
2 i'i'^i m k viiu m m mm vifa '
( 128 )
3 mm u m an m m \m 'Ht m ?i im l^qi.
4 m% mi \M^ im m m ifja tu &3mj.
6 lSq QiJ V13J fiau T11U 1^ m mm v\m win \m ?
7 m m^ ^ imm m \\ mm wnm u.
8 L^ifitju 2!]^ mj L^u JJT w Li(?i imi wrm im.
1
9 Vim m m Iw 3ji vn m lu gii vjqwiu^ mmti \n.
10 lu iJj:;LinFi u lot ifiau lumiiu QimR n rm um.
T
12 LOTUi^gu'^ura mnt iMmnvmrn^i^immm^m.
^^J^
i:; LUf] L^QU mnrjiPiuYnullitaiLiih £iu™liJ f\m-
14 'DT] ivsSm mil m mjlH jji vn niu iti!] l'^^^i fiB^ Im vt\
15 nuu fnii u LIT] iJj:;uim n l^u-''
16 L^^ju inp ulHu ra:;mu uu ran Hm lot in.
17 LJ1 JJT ™ llr^LVlFi tJy^LFlFI lu L^QU SUHFIU.
18 m% Lm L^Q 7u ^ d Lrau Mnm u j pi. oiob.
iv» L^QU u LLJjj vin m ra fiij ou i \A ?
^^ LSI LQfi di 131 i&n u vs] la ui Lnibu at v\m^^
( 129 )
Exercise 43.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1. Come at half past five p.m. on Friday.
2. He came home at 3 a.m. yesterday. 3. I
shall be busy at 4 p.m. to-morrow. 4. It is now
twenty minutes to 6 p.m. 5. It is 10.45 a.m.
6. I shall go home in April. 7. Come and see me
on Thursday morning. 8. Next Friday week
1 shall be very busy. 9. This table is 3 sawk
long and 2 sawk ^ wide. 10. How much is this
paddy per coyan? 11. I will return at noon.
12. Will you go for a walk at 10. a.m ? 13. I
cannot see him at 9 p.m. 14. It was raining at
12.30 p.m. 15. It is five minutes to 5 p.m.
16. They will arrive in November. 17. I went
out to find him last Monday. 18. In what year
were you born. 19. The Siamese inch is smaller
than the English inch. 20. I want a plank about
2 wah long.
(130 )
Chapter XX.
SOME MISCELLANEOUS SIAMESE IDIOMS.
1. Yes and No. There are various forms of
affirmation and negation used in Siamese which
differ according to the rank of the persons
concerned.
Yes. No.
to equals and inferiors.
2. -agfii LiJm'QQJij.lu'l'D' taafiJ
to superiors.
? ?
to princes.
4. mznmi4\T\wfii Sli^TiAiriAiviiL'Tisn miii
t f
to H. M. the King of Siam.
5. L'STai a poUte form used by women to men.
There are various other forms of affirma-
tion and negation which are used in answers to
questions, which differ according to the nature
of the question asked.
''./-/.
Ijj t Kt. not have IjJ m cannot.
( 131 )
Question fi iHu i^ ' Have you a house ' ?
Answer lu' II = ' No ' or S — ' Yes '.
Question mi t] ulU I]] ' Can you do this' ?
Answer Ijj li^"^ ' No ' V == ' Yes '.
The forms Sll^*^ and lu' LlJu are often
used instead of the usual IjJ ll^^ (cannot),
2. <2?/x^y^'io?2s.— Questions are asked by ad-
ding the particle r|1 to the end of the sent-
ence, r.f. chap. 12. § 9 and 10. <^.g. VIIU llJ 1^ IJ]
' can you go ?'. Questions of this nature, which
in English would be answered by a simple yes
or no, are answered in Siamese by repeating
the verb as follows.
Affirmative. llJ m Lit. go can = Yes.
Negative, lllm' Ll^"^ Lit. ' go not can'.=No.
A double form of question is often used :—
eg. Vl'iulll LLm q] !W=' Have you gone ? '
Lit. " Have you gone or not yet ?"
Affirmative answer. LlJ iim Have gone— Yes.
Negative answer, m Not yet = No.
( 132 )
The word ^ is rather perplexing since it
is used to mean ' yet ' and ' not yet ' in different
sentences.
3. Subovd'niaie 67« «.-v>.s-. — In Siamese, sub-
ordinate clauses are usually placed before main
clauses, when the reverse order is usually em-
ployed in English.
''.(J. iim m m \m ifiiu \.\m m m m m
I arrived after I had seen you.
Lit. When I had seen you I arrived.
4. In certain relative sentences the object
precedes the verb.
e.g. mtm%timnmm].
I have spent all the money that I had.
5. The word LOT is always placed last in a
sentence when it is the sign of the perfect tense.
N. B. In questions with tj], the word am
would come before V[\.
When \\m is placed first in a sentence, it is a
Conjunction meaning ' and then '.
6. The word ^ivinj means 'for the purpose
of ' ' used for ' ' in order to '. By the aid of this
( 133 )
word, and the word mfm "apparatus," many-
ideas can be readily expressed which have no
exact Siamese equivalents.
^. g. m kwmi a ' a saddle horse ' Lit. a
horse for riding.
Lf=lf0^ fWmi im 7\1 ' a camera '. Lit. apparatus
for making pictures.
7. fl is an intensitive particle used to add
emphasis to a sentence. It is frequently used
with the verbs m, and S.
e.g. 'au w\ M fl IM, 'I can (certainly) do this.
QQ n U 'He has cows', i.e. 'he has cows for
certain'.
8. m) is the negative form of the
imperative.
e.g. am Vll V. 'Do not do this'.
9. m is often used in the sense of to reach,
to arrive at.
e.g. mi ra nmm im ' I have arrived in
t
Bangkok.
( 134 )
10. mn always gives the idea of pleasure
as opposed to ■mt business.
Note these phrases.
Ill {.mi to go out on pleasure.
llJ iWJ} Jfl to go out for a drive.
mi 111 iWIi to go out for a walk.
llJ iraQ L?Q to go out for a sail or a row.
11. The English Gerund or Gerundive is
expressed by the phrase ni?^ St or lu fll? t St.
1
Going there is pleasant.
12. Note the idioms of these words.
(a) To wash aiu, lifl, m
anu ill „ to bathe, to wash oneself.
%\ = to wash clothes.
jfl^ = to wash plates, hands, things
generally.
{b) To carry m, LLUn, Villi, vnu, Q3J, m
ra to carry in the hand.
LLUn to carry on the shoulder,
( 135 )
vnu to carry on litter or palanquin.
vnu to carry on the back.
an to' carry a child on the hip.
t
ra to carry at arm's length.
13. The word LlJfn usually means " not '
but it is used in many phrases to mean "in vain "
or " simply."
e.g. mum LlJm •] To labour in vain. Lit.
tired for nothing.
U1 "01 llJfn "] Tea without anything added to
it.
14. The word W\ gives the idea of vague-
ness in numerical expressions,
e.g villi t m m\ LtIitIj About how much
a> ^ ck «^
money have you 1 <mi\ UU m fm a UTVl I have
a few ticals. Lit. about three or four ticals.
Note. — m W\ teak tree LJJ m teak wood.
15. The word OT is used in the same way
with lu-J (hour) to mean 'per hour' ^ lu<l t\l IVlllj
'How much per hour'. ?
( 136 )
COLLOQUIAL EXPRESSIONS AND MISCEL-
LANEOUS SHORT IDIOMATIC PHRASES.
You are right. ihi flfl
You are wrong. mil m\]l
What do you call this ? u if^fl Q1 arlj
Where have you been ? ifiiu llJ IviU 3J1
Where are you going ? vilU '^Z 111 IviU
What is the matter ? Lllu Q^l?
How old are you ? mil lyilij
Turn to the right. wm liTl
Turn to the left. ifeg ¥]U
Go straight on. ra^ 111
Go back home. nmi llJ inu
I beg your pardon. W LTiy
Come here. SJI U f or in U ii\lZ
Go there. llJ ^ UU
Where do you live ? lilU 011 fi \m
What do you want? ra^ mjffil?
( 137 )
What business is it of ^.
yours ? sr 0tb
f
What is your name ? m 'tzh
What is the time ? n Im LOT
I am not quite sure. W \ii ? LLU or lil Vinu
Can you do it or not ? il 1^ vm \i\ Ipl
Where can I find it ? vnlH i \m
I cannot do it. 1^1 l3J 111
Will you do it ? in vm Lllfn
Is dinner ready ? QlVil? L^?^ LOT Wb m
All right. ^ LL^g
I do not know what it is. mih nlll V1J11J
Anything will do. 0^1? "] n 111
What are you doing ? m 0"!?
Go right away. J^llllf
What have you got there? U flsl? i mj
What is this used f or ? U mm a:;!?
Be quiet. it^ ? or itw "]
( 138 )
How much is this ? U J1f=n LVlllj
How do you do ? mu aUlU IJ)
Quite well thank you. ?\mu ^
Good bye. -mj m DQU
Good bye (more polite). EJU m llJ Vim or tJJJ m TI
That is all nonsense. uii llJ Lllu LJ^H
Please (invitation) iftt)
Please take some. if Oj flllljtVlIU ah MUQU
Thank you. taaiJ l-'i
Thank you very much. WU l-S vnu JJIfl
I do not want it. ui LQI
No thank you (polite). W\i l-S ilh l,§QJ V11U Lfi?l
Is Mr. at home ?• U1LJ ad Vila ^
u
No, he is not at home UlEjllJ m
Bye and bye. "^T.mn flSU
Wait a minute. FlQEJ liJtL^Ejg
There is none left. vm i\m ov%t \.ym
( 139 )
Have you any more. ti Qfl vm 111
A.
Give me some more. LQI UT Qfl
^
Just a very little. m IW^
At full speed. L?g m mm
Too bad for words. leiu ^
Excessive. iviflfl \m
It is all quite spoilt. m/m vm \.m
Small change. Lfu ll^fl
You worthless fellow. m IllVTIEJ
Chinaman (slang term) Vi^ VIU
To ride in a Ricksha .'
(slang term). '^vami m^ m
One's native land. lilU itm LJ1
What date is it to-day ? gu U I LVnl?
Take care. r'H 5
You are very foolish ! Tttl sf^ •]
You liar! dlEjlflVin
Hurry up ! if] 131
( 140 )
To give change. YlQIl 0^
Never mind. - IsJ Lllu a:;!?
Slacken speed. LIJT mm
Stop. v\m
Get out of the way. Vl^n mEJ 3
Can you speak EngUsh ? m mViV\Vi Ipl fj]
Wait for an answer. f^0LI \MU
Late at night. ^fl
To get the carriage
ready.
II
To pull a punkah. 'an M
SOME SIAMESE PROVERBS.
A certain insight into the mode of thought
of a nation may be obtained by an examination
of its common proverbial expressions.
Notice the following common Siamese pro-
verbs, their literal translations, and the equiv-
alent English proverbs.
( 141 )
1. VIU IMi iJ" 'Hm lit. If you run away
from the tiger, you meet the crocodile; Par-
rallel English Proverb. Out of the frying pan
into the fire.
2. 1AIk™i?i!j13J mu m lit. The Sun ^does not
wait. Parallel English Proverb. Time and tide
wait for no man.
3. llJ iil am mi m lit. When you go into
the jungle do not forget your knife. Parallel
English Proverb. Forewarned is forearmed.
4. Til LSLIQ am "Sm im lit. Do not send your
boat across a rapid. Parallel English proverb.
Do not run your head against a stone wall.
Translate, and give the parallel English proverbs
( where possible) for the following Siamese
proverbs.
1. am Lai mm'i m jji inn nu "aT] mu.
2. lia uau am liJ m vn«3 Lia.
t
3. ?m LUEJ im ua tia Ig in ngi.
( 142 )
4.
vujiu wwfii'] imM.
5.
m\ w ih m.
6.
imt tan im ui tJu.
7.
m I'm am ilmmn.
8.
m 3i?i m\ tiin.
9.
]\m m h m \^.
10.
muluamiln aan.
11.
rrammimuwi.
12.
m\ m m mu vj.
13.
am iih vm mu mr].
14.
v\m immi\i\fm.
15.
m inm mu a lu.
16.
gg vnu aau Pian
17.
aT^ wm m\?i "hlu tiJulwi
18.
cJuismliiYiQ ii.
19.
h ^^IviuiJfn n^^uii
20.
In ^ijj LW^i:; au f=iu ^tjj imr um
21.
!i]a f=iQiLi nfn^ muqi
( 143 )
Chapter XXL
LETTER WRITING.
The chief formulae used in Siamese corres-
pondence t6 begin and to end a letter are as
follows ; —
1. From master to servant, father to child,
superiors to inferiors generally.
Begin xk and put the name.
End with signature only.
2. From a firm to a, private individual or
rice versa, or between equals where no intimacy
exists : —
Begin \.m mm JJT d^ [Name] wm mi
Endlu ^ fiPi u aa am^ pmu im m m m {Naine) jm
and signature or use f=mjj LPIITII instead of m\li
mm,
3. Between friends of equal rank : —
Begin i\<wnm m TO JJ1 m {Name) mu m\
End lu ^api u m LLara mi3j jn \m mm Jfjn in
m V11U mi Signature.
( 144 )
4. From a private individual or firm to a
man of title, i.e. Luang, Pra, Phya, or Chow
Phya or from servant to master.
Begin mull m m f=im (Name& Title) TOIIJ mu
or mUJJld^™ (Name & Title) mi]} mu
End lu ^ ^[Fi u w mm mm mjra mi^ ?\^ m m
Pim (Name and Title) mu and Signature.
Note. — If to a phya or chow phya use
L'fJPiru with the name.
IP
5 From a private individual or a firm to
a prince of the rank of Mom Chow: —
aJ I U
Begin TO UT Ll^ VluaULSI (Name) Yinu ratJ
End PigjC f^l-^nLffg m '^z TO^IiIjpi and Signature.
6. From a private individual or a firm to
a Royal Prince :—
Begin pJlup Vil?rL'=ll UQ^EJlIQ (Name and
Title) vi?iije!Ii wj:;ijivi
( 145 )
End. mi S mj iih m "^t \\m mm "^ and
signature.
( For examples of Siamese letters see
Exercises 116-135).
Notes' oil Siaiiieye 7'if.les-.
There are two classes of Siamese titles : —
1. Royal titles, which are hereditary to a
certain extent.
2. Non Royal titles, which are hot
hereditary.
1. Royal Titles:
The children of the King by the Queen have
the rank of 1%! ^1 Chow fa.
The Crown Prince has the title of
aULm WJ:;!]?!]!^?!!!™. Somdet Praboromorasah-
tirat.
Other children of the King have the title of
nitmh iHl. Pra Ong Chow.
These princes may be raised to the title of
Krom V3li of which there are several degrees.
The sons of all these princes are called
VIIIBJJ ISI . Mom Chow, and are grandsons of
the Xing.
The son of a Mom Chow is a Mom Racha-
wongse; VIUBJJ nm^h and the son of a Mom
( 146)
Rachawongse is a Mom Luang ; mw vm^. The
son of a Mom Luang is an ordinary commoner
\nu. = Mr,
Thus it may be seen that Royal titles die
out in five generations.
2. No// Roiial tiller. A commoner (uiu) maybe
raised to the following titles of which the first
named is the lowest.
1. Khoon. 21! 2. Luang, vm^ 3. Pra mt
4. Phya mtm 5. Chow Phya LSI mtVf\ 6. Som-
det Chow Phya, mim LSI mtn\.
These titles are equivalent to European
orders of knighthood and must not be translated
by such titles as Baron, Marquis, etc,, as these
Siamese titles are not hereditary.
Note (i. ) the sons of noblemen of the rank
of Phya or higher bear the courtesy title of Pim
Note (ii.) Mom wau alone is a title for the
wives of Princes.
aitjandfl are abusive epithets or titles ap-
plied the former to men and the latter to women.
These words are equivalent to the English words
" varlet " or "fellow " in the old meaning of the
words. These terms are used also for criminals.
( 147 )
Siamese habitually give the. title of Pltli to their
elder relatives when referring to them.
e.q. f=ini^ elder brother or sister, Pltm/^Q
father PimLLJJ mother. PimiJl aunt, etc.
T r
QILIVHi mM. are used as pet names for
11 !J ^
small children.
Chapter XXII.
THE COURT LANGUAGE.
There are very many special words which
are used when speaking to or about Royal
personages in Siamese instead of the ordinary
words.
These words usually begin with either the
prefix Wt for nouns or, 1/lJ'^ which shews that the
word following i,s a verb.
Most of the words are derived or taken
directly from the Pali and Sanskrit languages.
It is not necessary for Europeans to learn to
speak the Court language, but it is useful to
know something about it, as it is always employ-
ed in Royal proclamations, official notices, history,
and all matters relating to Royalty.
The principal classes of these special words
are :
( 148 )
1. Tlif paiis of till' IkkIii. Examples.
Hair ordinary word m Royal word mzixm
Foot „ im ,, mt]m
Ear ., ^ ,, wrnm
Mouth ,, iJnn „. w^la^
etc. etc. etc.
2. C'diiinioit (i/i/i'cfs hcloiKjiiig to ((ihI iixcd %
Riilialtji.
Clothes, ordin. word lIb m Royal word "mm mim'r\
Mosquito net,, m „ inr^fU
Walking stick,, \l\ im „ SU WIJOT
etc. etc. etc.
3. Artirh's of Jooil (1 11(1 ih-'iitlr
Tea ordinary word fc Royal word lAIJ^fillJR JQli
Food generally , , miT\ 01V11J , , mtV^TJIwmw.
etc. etc. etc.
4. Most names of common fruits and fish
used as articles of food, also certain kinds of
flowers, e. (J.
Melon, ordinary word, lira lu Royal word. eJH wm
Sole (fish) ,, ,, ilm^iiviui ,, iJm^u?iTTnl;
etc. etc. etc.
( 149
)
5.
riui
King
Itdatirc.
.s- •'. (J.
le.
T
Royal word
t.
til
,, WKJJimnu
etc.
etc.
etc.
6. Most common rci-hs of bodily (iction.
Togo
111 Royal word
mm
Togofor a walkllJ mm
,, falFl
To sleep UQU
., UJJTIJJ
To eat nu fll llri/lIU
,, i?m
To think m
,, 1/1?^ mmm
To write or read Lauu,91U
,, vi?^ wranm
To permit auojIIFl
To give IVi
,, mznmiu
To offer (to the
King)
,, miu
To die Wti]
,, mmm
etc. etc.
etc.
( 150 )
7. y/oii''.^- oj A II 'nil ah.
Pig, ordinary word V13J Royal word aflJ
Dog ,, V1U1 ,, mm
Cow ,, 73 ,, \\
Buffalo ,, m\ii ,, riA
etc. etc. etc.
The student will find a complete list of
these words in any of the small books called
EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES SHOWING THE DIF-
FERENCE BETWEEN ORDINARY SIAMESE AND
HIGH SIAMESE.
1. Where is he going? 1*31 '^:; llJ mn \m.
Where is His Majesty going :" mzv[m ^iUK^lS
2. I will give you this horse, mj Ht^ m m U
un vnii.
May I present Your Majesty with this horse.
m:;wvisLsn w mtii'HYiin miu m m u.
3. May I do this ? w \v\ W il m? m U 1^ IviJj.
(151 )
May it please Your Majesty to graciously
permit me
to do this ?
1
ra:;?i'Q
vnu mzwm
jTEniinjiPi m mj m u.
4. He
said that he
was ill.
L!31
1
m
q't 1*31
r
His Majesty said that he was unwell.
EXAMPLE OF A CONTINUOUS PASSAGE IN
HIGH SIAMESE.
The King having passed a good night, arose
next morning and partook of tea and eggs His
Majesty then received a deputation from the
leading merchants, who presented a petition.
His Majesty was dressed in full military uniform
with medals. In the afternoon, the Royal phy-
sician was summond to the Royal Palace, as Her
Majesty the Queen was suffering from a severe
toothache, which however was speedily cured.
nit uvn r]7iwm m^ mtvatm vm m\ iih m m.
ujjviu Lianw ih Lin i'lm wtmimmum vte^mi^'] im'^
u.._,^„„ ,„_,-"[-
( 152 )
vi?^ wm mzmPi im m ^u mil un ll^i ]\zm lfijq^
Chapter XXIII.
SOME POINTS OF SIAMESE ORTHOGRAPHY.
1 and 1. The vowel [ is used only in the
following words, most of which are very fre-
quently used. Those of less common occurrance
are marked with an asterisk.*
In^ near. I'D to use.
m whoever. ivinj 'large.
IviJJ new. Lpf under, south.
lf=lj who ? lu in.
Ipij to wish for. In leaf, sail.
( 153 )
h heart. llT dumb.
I'D it is so. * 1e!1 to think about.
fiZiTf daughter-in-law.
L!J fibre, spider's web.
« * m^m infatuated.
m clear, pure.
Ifi to put.
m to give.
Words ending in the sound of K.P.T. usual-
ly have the letters fi. U. I^. as the final consonants
respectively. The following are the common
exceptions to this rule, in addition to which the
more common words will be found which contain
the less commonly used consonants, arranged
under the respective consonants.
■3 (final) Fia happy. lf\'h figures, numbers.
PI (final) m disease, mm company.
fdh to volunteer.
?\ F=1Q neck.
*a ^'l to kill, ^m a gong.
\.4w to beat, it'm a large bell.
( 154 )
Kl'^ a trolley. LJJ^ a cloud. IMfl'S'ig
executioner.
S (final) !fl LflLI'^ lazy ifim prince ais able
PIJQ^ to inspect QTUTS power, authority
fi'^ duty actions L?i?S finished Ll/1'^
mendacious I^IJ']'^ Royal Lictors.
•a (final) ^jJlflU solemn procession m U'D merchant
UQ'D to enter the priesthood.
QJ LUIQ a tree.
Oj Ivirij large ^lHttj important VlSjl grass
JjaOj Peguan vi^^ woman ?inj zero
L^nj to invite "flnuinj clever isfnj to pros-
per mm^ ordinary LUnj-^j five flOjUS lock
LlJjtJnj professor immj dollar, medal.
anififa) to praise, national anthem.
IJIQJ^ accounts. Qji^ relations, and some
others.
( 155 )
tt) nj ^njnjl agreement, contract fojOjl soul
linjQjl wisdom, talent.
fj n^ priest's quarters ^m petition, paybill
InJ ten millions n^VIUI^ laws llnrig
clear, intelligible T\h^ populace 'nzTfi
crown used by actors njflfllPlJJ July.
g iJjtpU almanac ll^n goad.
^ m att. m brick, a^ camel. iJk;l^m
excellent. \m^ rich man. j^lJlfi gov-
ernment, dtii^nu position, form.
"Ifl UDiTflfi province, county.
HJ QUWOJ Wednesday. Uim old man. i^iiQ mtWi
the planet Mercury.
Q] iJj^JJItU about. ?intli aristocratic, well bred
PlDl benefit, or a title. lunm ancient.
ulnm neighbourhood. wmwlVIEJ orchestra.
( 156 )
ff\ (final) mm to notice. amlPI proverbs.
tl (final) munjtl brave, m carriage, !aUfl mutiny,
rebellion, fM\ oath, luEl temple or shrine.
71 (final) U1V1 tical mii quarrel, disturbance.
llinm to despise, UVl lesson, chapter, ijfilvi
commercial company.
I I^ flag, IJ:; business, Lia (See prouoiuis)
IlJ joss stick, 0™ weapons WI culprit, IriJI
angry, -mJYlJ'aiS eclipse of the moon, mnm
eclipse of the sun, "gi method, f UIUPI? bank
note, S??3Jm ordinary, IJJJJLUtJJJ custom
MJ3J right, duty, justice.
ll (final) iJill wickedness, shame, ?ll form, shape.
l/niJ continent.
yj (final) fiQ^ m army, Jil nilAl picture, m corpse,
vnm to respect, Vd^ mW] Bangkok.
( 157 )
n Slim Chinese junk ?\z\n daughter in law,
iWiZ only, QlinQ district flL^n mountain,
^im power, mw pink, f\mil wife, iimm
hornet mu Vllil for the future and many-
other words.
J pronounced as M mv temple, nvilJ soldier,
aivn? food, raJ ought to, lhjj? Cambodian,
mLIJ diligent, m favour, mJ work, business
'mifVa chief priest, abbot.
J Pronounced QQU
ura city, fira theatre, ariMJ consonant
alufiJ club, assembly.
77 Pronounced ati
lJ3im tribe, race, UJJVin to load, UJJVfl
line, flJJm wife, BFISWEJ curious,
inquisitive, «??FI to choose, nn3J death,
misfortune, IJJU duty, justice.
( 158 ;
UJJmnm? presents, FiJjfi pregnant, WJJWT or
gjJHT Buddhist Lent and many others.
TiJ Pronounced 11
mtlim Ministry, yiM property, wealth,
T/inu to know, Yin3J common, inferior,
im^ m? Kedah, m IviJ A tree, wmm
eagle, yiJlEJ mu) sand, YIJ^ to tell ( High
word and prefix).
t\ (final) m to tell (to princes), mfi law court,
m artifice, m mv private soldier, W llj
fruit, JJ^Pin auspicious, ]]izw to fix a price,
m low, mm place, address, Jl^Qfi prize,
reward, lil Pinc^, sugar, piu mf\ 'lewd fellows
of the baser sort', minn to swear upon
oath.
Fl (final) iJrmFl notice, aimF) climate, fpi point
of the compass, LlAiFi sex, ^mm French, hJfi
half an att, iJjaYlR country.
( 159 )
il (final) IIJH male, vntt slave, IviU punishment.
Tlrh wonderful, mW{)i English nrmM
paper liiim special,
III Ulim clock, '^il hair pin, IfllilF! or tIfi half
an att.
^ nXf\ Malay kriss. nrjU vernacular, a^nrjW
English, ^rnvj^ Sanskrit, Xf\ season, ilrjnm
to deliberate, iJj:;vir]i behaviour, gu lAiqwiu^
Thursday, mi lAiqMFlU^ Jupiter, i/^iqFimFIJJ May,
lAirjFlfmLlli November.
in r]] == WQ "or', or the sign of a question
V^^]i hermit.
J] rjfl deep Jrjn remembrance.
TU 1^0^ m notorious.
A list of the more common words having a
silent final consonant (karan) <^ with meanings.
ta ?)^°a conch shell trumpet. Vina misfortune.
mm dog.
( 160 )
Fl Q^Pl Designatory Particle of Royal personages,
•oim tunnel, ]hzf\m desire.
sa Wt^^'n Buddhist priest.
1\ LfltUTfl conscription
m lj!u?m plentiful, mimm Brahmin, finHm
s'
u
behaviour, code of laws.
J] l?inU!^ top knot cutting ceremony, ?).3nJ1U!^ solar
new year festival, lJ?tVir|l?l manners, be-
haviour.
tl uimzi snuff.
S qvif power.
VI dij'^^UVl steps, stairs.
U iJjtlLI'DU use, useful, Imu 400 sen,
1j^ mtmlu Royal Mint, LVIRU sermon
mm * amusing, pleasurable.
W WUVI print, type.
U WFl^J poison.
( 161 )
U MK;LW pagoda, l^llJjSUtJ Post office,
mt-Qimtl the Sun, Bivim a week, m^ true
nn mu pupil, scholar, mm mankind, wm
property, InriEJ *the Earth mtwm King.
? WT3 sacred writings miWU bank note
•Ki LSI? Saturday, l?n3 rarLOT Saturn, Til -^UTO
Monday, mt'mu the Moon, '^n? machine,
engine, iVW diamond, #1J seven tiered
a' a'
umbrella, W\l son or daughter, QiruiLSPlJarea,
IWS um boundary,
Q apn animal.
U LTIM giant.
a mii swan.
Vi LP=in:;M chance, fortune, miv\ patience,
perseverance.
There are many other Pali and Sanskrit
words having a silent consonant at the end, but
the above list includes all the words which are in
common use.
Words marked * are usually written without the silent
final consonant.
( 162 )
Foreign words which have been incorporated
into the Siamese language retain their spelUng as
far as possible.
To express European names in Siamese
characters, the following points should be noticed.
[[) The spelling in Siamese should be strictly
phonetic.
2 For Transliteration of the English con-
sonants use the following Siamese consonants.
B. IJ
L
fi
C (hard) fl
or
Fl
M
3J
C (soft) !D
N
Ng
Ch(hard) n
or
f=l
P
Ph
W or iJ
Ch (soft) "Q
Q
m
D ^
R (initial)
J
F VJ
S
!I1
G (hard) n
Sh
•a
G (soft) u
or
-^
T
PI
H a
V. W
1
( 163 )
J tJ or
^
Y EJ
K n or
PI
X. Z. H
For the Vowels.
A as in father
1
I as in his
A as in fame
L
I as in high
A as in hand
11
short, between 2
consonants
A as in hat
tU
<'.g. Tom. a TfiQjj
A final short
h
long as in so 1
E as in hen
a
U
Oo short as in book f
E as in see
A
Oo long- ... boot 11
U as in cue ^g
U as in hut ^
The sound aw, should be represented by
fl after a consonant or m (initial).
The sound er should be represented by L + a?
(final) or L^+ when there is a final consonant.
The sound ccr should be represented by itu.
The sound ow should be represented by L+1.
Final // as in ?«// by 1.
(164 )
3. Never use (i.) the high class consonants
(ii.) the rarer consonants 2 T etc, in transliteration.
4. Final consonants of the nature of K.P.T.
should have the karan ='.
5. Initial St. sc etc., should be written thus:
e.g.
Scotland
Smith
The following is a list of words which the
Siamese language has borrowed from European
languages.
Portuguese.
English.
English.
French.
English.
English.
English.
English.
English.
English.
n?tmu
paper.
WTJfi
carat.
nai
copy.
niLvJ
coffee
flLJflLra
director.
•mf[
brandy.
imi
boy, servant.
m
bill
\.m
shirt.
m
u
boot.
( 165 )
uu
u
boom of a
ship.
English.
LLiivirf
bank.
English.
lui^
boat.
English.
liJ?ig(?i
private.
English.
LLlJfiU
surveyor's
plan,
English.
ilu
pin.
English.
lll^pl
police.
English.
tjj'^
European.
French.
rJ^3Lf»iPi
French.
French.
t
foot,
foot rule
1
English.
monsoon.
English,
SuPi
minute.
English.
mULraQUJJli
Mrs.
smart, well dressed
pound, lb. or £.
English
(ma'am.)
English (gen'
tleman.)
English.
^a^
receipt.
English.
(166 )
In
week.
English.
mu
school term.
English.
u
soap.
Portuguese.
flannel (properly red English (scai
flannel). let),
hotel. French.
wM?\
office.
English.
LQLEJU
agent.
English.
ILIJPIUlf
postage stamp.
English.
salute (of guns).
English.
and many
other technical words.
Example of an Interlinear literal translation of
an easy continuous passage of idiomatic
Siamese with English version.
( From the First Siamese Reading Book. )
nrpiifj m v\w im an mi
Rabbit thing one spoilt leg walk
A rabbit witir.li had hurt its leg and could
ijj m UQU an m m Ljj
no can, sleep was under tree
not walk was slecjnng iindfr a tree.
( 167 )
LLvi^ vi^^ am m m \.ki
place one goat thing one spoilt
A blind goat was' walking about to
d
PIT im m LYim vn nu n"
eye walk come on pleasure to look for to eat with
look for something to eat with its Jriends.
LWBU m^ IWQU L^U liJ In^f
friends miss the way friends walk go near
Having sti'ayed Jrom its Jriends, it
mtsfm r\vmi mu am m n
rabbit Rabbit see goat come (so)
went near the rabbit. The rabbit saw the goat
vm <^ "^ viu n Ijj m
fear will run run away (so) no can
i-oming and was afraid, but could not run away.
goat spoilt
the goat iras
vnn vm
blind so it was glad and was no longer afraid.
m iLn
liJ \.m
enough and
go see
Presently
it sair that
pn n
eye (so)
good heart. (|
( 168 )
^^ ^ m fii ^ PI 2
f II
then put occasion to make which fierce to threaten
Thru it pvt on a. Hcrce threatenimj look
111 gi mi Ifij t. 3J1 vn t jm
go say there who will come to look for at death
and said. " There ! irlio is coming to seek
(sign of question)
dmth ?
'J\ U a. ^ a d tJ
iv\t m m m uu n vm
goat (sign of past tense) hear thus that (so) fear
The goat henr'nig this was ajraid, and
% mu i!m T\ '"m mi ^'i \a
then soft ask often say ' please do not kill to let
then begged hiimhJii s((ii'uhi^ " Please do not kill
fm im mi 'x. liqu liJu T\
die at all I will grant to be I
lae, it is onlij /"
nrmii f[ Is IvT imi iT[ in \m
Rabbit glad let goat enter come near
The rabbit teas glad, allowed the goat to
( 169 )
n §u 3 vm Liw:;
(so) got up to ride back goat
approach, got upon the goat's haok^ and rode
m 111 lii ill.
enter go in forest.
off into the J or est.
It will thus be seen how very differently the
Siamese sentence has to be turned to make good
English, Hence can be deduced the golden rule
for translating from Siamese to English and vice
versa " Always translate one sentence in Siamese
by the corresponding senicuce in English and do
not translate word for word."
( 170 )
MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES
FOR TRANSLATION.
The Exercises from No. 44 onwards should
be used at the discretion of the teacher, as soon
as the Student has mastered chapter 20 :
The words will be found in the Vocabularies
at the end of the book ; but many of the common
words which the Student is supposed to have
already learnt, have not been repeated in the
General Vocabularies.
The Student should have plenty of practice
in Reading, and in Dictation.
For dictation, the easier passages from the
First Siamese Reader may be used.
Exercise 44.
READ AND TRANSLATE INTO ENGLISH.
1 wj '3Q1J auu jjin m auu m
u
3 gu u vnu viil^j % in mi
4 L-jm mu L3iL7i LiJ vnpiuuu
5 m m lu mm m m Lu m
6 uan f=iu 1^ m^ viiu Ivi lai in 21 jjh vi
7 viuTnlu m vnii la ui sin Iviu?
( 171 )
8 LjjB giuu vnu m m unu mu {.im ?\ im iT\
9 '^^ \^t\.f\m ?\m m^ ah to It' uu 1^ im u
10 nan piu mi ?fi Ivi viupi i u
Exercise 45.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 At what time do you get up in the
morning? 2 He cannot write very well, 3 You
will go home when the carriage comes. 4 Have
you lost your hat ? 5 If so, you must go and
find it. 6 Will you have dinner with us to-mor-
row ? 7 We shall be very pleased to come.
8 How many persons can sit in that boat. ? 9 I
do not know, but I think four only. 10 I did
not hear what you said just now.
Exercise 46.
Read and Translate into English.
1 un viu MM m uu mi a mnj m m
2 ran lii mi u lHu m sin i \m ?
( 172 )
3 m u tu '^t\]\ vn m i\w mu, ifinu "^ ill i^^^ we ?
4 lu
b
vnu m viu nau moj uu Lu m
6 mi s:;lvi piu 1^ w^ m m lqi viu lu uu liJ inu
7 SB Ivi ?i^ 30^ imi u m VI uiu ^u
8 uarb'aitj vinuuu un^ umluLvnuu
9 Qu u cJu Pin Ivioj liu III L^mliJ "Ui
10 LlJli B^Ij A 9!J Qn lulpl
Exercise 47.
Translate into Siamese.
1 Tell the servant to light the lamp.
2 You must write this again. 3 Go and find that
book quickly. 4 Do you want to see my father ?
5 Your hands are very dirty, go and wash them.
6 I am very tired this morning. 7 That is
wrong, you must do it again. 8 Where did you
find this book ? 9 There are no trees in my
garden. 10 Take this letter to the doctor, and
wait for an answer.
( 173 )
Exercise 48.
Read and Translate into English.
1 lUQ Ttwu 'm m hi 'iiu ui im lu mm
3 THiu Lm Lvrn m m im wn m ■
4 mi Ifflvi latju '^i^iviJJiu'tiiJij u ?iijj viu
5 vnu Jii faiu QHvn? imi wd m ?
(j Lm m u fiQiJ Tfii nujjnn m 111 i^^g Lfiu
7 \t\ -am m m n m\i m lu
8 ira IiaI 2q^ vnu im ifi m im \i au •]
i> LQfn m -au d sjt vnu mim vn mi lq^^i mu
10 ui ^ mj w m lUfl li nt^itj u mu lsli ura
Exercise 49.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Can you give me change for a tical ? 2 I will
not take it all in atts. 3 Bring that bill again
on the first of next month. 4 At what time
does the train start for Paknam ? 5 I do not
know, go and look at the notice. 6 Is there any-
( 174 )
thing worth seeing in that town ? 7 I have
forgotten your address, please tell me again.
SjfAU people should learn to swim while they are
young. 9 He does not eat much, but he drinks
too much. 10 What do you wish to see me
about ?
Exercise 50.
Read and Translate into English.
1 lu mu mi t am n v\m ?
2 mu t iJinm ira wn ? ^ ^ vn m
s tm m i uii wn LiJm ? i\ m m m
4 viviTj Lvifji m m q^Ij sd ^ u ?
ti
5 gu u m^ lij Vmi liJ 7\ mi
6 LjjQ i!in li^ m mu uu L-ai Li '
mu uu L-ai w\ im mm nvimu
8 YiTii t m m vrilu vitih mfi ? "iiij m uu an ao^ uivi
9 mj Wm uu sii dg^ llto lii llu'u -=):; m urn
10 'Kiumm'mw muz 'tiuu im «] ^o liJ tfiu tiq
( 175 )
Exercise 51.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 I am writing letters, do not disturb me.
2 What is that blacksmith making ? 3 I shall
buy a new horse the day after to-morrow.
4 I received a letter from my brother yesterday.
5 Will you take a bath this evening ? 6 Do not
eat sweet cakes in the morning. 7 I have read
that book many times. 8 My father has paid
away all the money that he had yesterday. 9
The gardener is planting pretty flowers in my
garden. 10 I drink coffee in the morning, but
in the afternoon, I prefer to drink tea.
Exercise 52.
Read and Translate into English.
1 imi \Mi w. m auuul fiii im Lmlatn
2 mi 111 nBu m fm fiu in wnt mi rm
3 vnu Ivi m mm m m lim vitu \m 111
4 m'^m^ 1m lTu mm un vnu ivnl? ^i -st mmi '
5 m iw ^uj m uu #1 n^^fn im % mill \m
u
( 176 )
6 mj f\m m iJfn m am wi^ m liJ lu ar
7 LL3J "Sm TilM 7 \.Tfi <h VIIU llJ {.Wl '■
u
8 viiu inn Qtlj QLilu raj iTu ^ mi nn^^i anu viiwia ati
Exercise 53.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 How many bottles of wine are there in
that box ? 2 Please bring me some blotting
paper and a pencil. 3 How many carriages are
there -in the road ? 4 If you have plenty of
money, you can buy that house. 5 This curry
is the best that your new cook has ever made.
6 Did you keep many horses ? No only two.
7 Did you give those coolies two salungs each ?
8 No I gave them twenty atts each only. 9 How
many knives did you buy this morning ? 10 The
elephant is much stronger than the horse.
(177)
Exercise 54.
Read and Translate into English.
1 itm m Qu m m li^Tnu itv rim mn ^^ m m mu
2 tn yIiu fiu i\tm m "] mi m s" l^u uin
3 m ^lu Pin vi'iu Ijj' mi liJ Iviu
4 mi m "in iliu iim mi Ivinj m mu iiw mu ?njj m
5 tatljjtj Piu MM fin L^^u ill ^
6 tfi ?n Ivl lii Lm'u 111 lI^ l?i '^t liJ IjJ mi Lim m\yi
7 lIu ^ mi L01 1'f lu pf u fin dfi l^^ vijj?! LLfig
8 mi JiiiJKvnu mwi iS'^ am miz wu '^z\]\ wm
9 mhi Tfi'iu I3J fifl^ iHu uu mil i wiM dnjnji
10 L-an uan mi 'in gii u '^i:; imm m sa^ m 1\ mu
Exercise 55.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Which of these dogs did you sell to my
brother ? 2 Be careful that the tram-conductor
does not give you a bad salung. 3 The thief
was arrested by that policeman for stealing
clothes. 4 Which of you would like to come for a
(178)
drive with me to-day ? 5 If you wish to live
here, I will build you a nice house. 6 While I
was having my dinner, the electric light went
out. 7 Having heard that your brother was ill,
I went to visit him. 8 If it were raining now, I
should not go out. 9 If you had run quickly,
you would not have been late. 10 If you ran
quickly, you would not be late.
Exercise 56.
Read and Translate into English.
1 mi lim Lai 1^ il 1'=) ^ m m liIu m uin 1*21 Vi
Ivi m mi^ f\f\m tm l?i m mAi nimu i
1
wi mj iJi^ vnu m '^r t mm um mn
3 'Sij ™ s:;lvi viu^ia aanfiulvinj'] u llh yiiu
vnu l-s 7\ LLvi '] WW 1'^ liin
4 viiu ^t Hi iJoiu un fn i)\m •] vi^? m \.m lqt
5 uan '=)in uu Ltai QLiin lli atli an vm ? ^r tan
(179 )
usn 'h aa mi\ il^ iLt^ luli ll3^ Ivi lan ui^
6 figtj Ling ?m lu uu iipin ll^ m u III ia en a In
8 LWQu lim ifiiu QiLilij Liri mn Laivifa ?s" iiri ran
9 ynu i?m^ qili l^ai ^qu lvipi di viiu I ifiEJs :jin uci
nfin n mejiu m^
10 vnu S Pigm Iq (?ij^ 'sf^ llw lm ij f=igiu umi^ inn
Exercise 57.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 He told me that he would answer your
letter next Thursday ; have you received any
reply ? 2 If the money has been stolen by that
man, we shall have to inform the police. 3 If
they are playing polo, I will go and watch them
at 5 p.m. this afternoon. 4 He asked me
whether I had seen the new house which he had
built. 5 He explained to him that the machine
was used for folding paper. 6 If your friend is
having his dinner, do not call him, I will come
( 180 )
later in the afternoon. 7 When I called at your
house two days ago they said you were not at
home. 8 The bill-collector said that the money
must be paid before the end of the month. 9
He jumped out of the railway carriage before
the train had stopped, and so he broke his leg.
10 I have only a little money in the house ; so go
to the bank and bring me change for this cheque.
Exercise 58.
Read and Translate into English.
1 LSI Ijj' li?r hmu mn m mm imz f=igi3j 1^'
-' 711 u '^:;1.3j' V m mil iiAiJxdn i/i'iu st;ljj m i mi
:- m m Lvim mu m mu s!^ m m m ui 3Jin
m mu
4 LVim iith Lilu i^ f n'lu wu vm m mm m "]
m mi m ii mu "^t m mm Q:;^'uQm^^f ul^^i'
1
lu ]m um ?)ijj m
( 181 ;
]k, ikn v\m w s:; lai wu ij^ jjt an
miu "am m
8 LBT i!\t\ i ^ mi \m m Vi'm m m v\m lot lqi
9 mi LSI uipnfildlii iri'DT taa^ rm vm LVi^a mu
m !?ia W ravi l?i Lvi uatj hqi w. ii
10 lu Mil lu u fi HOT ufi jj:;jj'q^ Lvii mi
Exercise 59.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 What do you want these sticks for ? I
want them for beating dogs. 2 What did you
buy at the market this morning ? I bought some
chilies and a duck. 3 How much did you pay for
that duck ? I paid five salungs. That was very
•dear. 4 They told me that prices were high
owing to the Chinese New Year. 5 Are you
sure there were no fish for sale ? I did not see
( 182 )
any at all. 6 Tell the cook that if he does not
give me a better dinner than this to-morrow, I will
cut his wages three ticals. 7 I must really dis-
miss my coolie, I found him smoking opium in
the dining room. 8 Can you tell me where I
can procure a Siamese cook, I hear they can
make good curry. 9 I wish you would tell my
gardener not to cut down those plants. 10 What
is the matter with the watchman ? I think he
is drunk. Send him away at once, or call a
policeman to take him to the Police Station.
Exercise 6o.
Read and Translate into English.
1 mm ■urn mi t m m umn mi m m im
■2 LSI LiJu iiviTp t f\mu m m m v\m lu Im u
imit [m nth imz di lim^ T\m iJnTiR mi m\i
JQ!J1?1
B Ti'iu Vi m jjin mSaumiraQ iildi mvm, u mi
'M S 3Jin vh\ mu mi uiyi
4 ifi'iii \y\ "(Ai im m. 30 T11U m m m \K
( 183 )
5 lu mi i lIq '^m \m m. ti rlnilu miu m wa ?
6 itla Tiu u viiu Vim Im m y\ m mi m ViJdatJ
11
8 rm wn wpxi mn ? mj 'Qqu su uin dqi
9 lu iiiii uii fi mm n inu ? i?i al^ Fina^ S ad vin
II 11
UnU LLC^ 1^ i}^ VtUU UlJl?l UTU
11
10 m '^^ ill >3TU v\ l?vi L^flfj uu fl m n ™ ?
Exercise 6i.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 If I see you gambling again, I will fine
you five ticals. 2 If you had gone home last
night, you might have been able to have caught
the thief. 3 What are you waiting for ? Don't
you see I have nothing to give you ? 4 Mind
your own business, and do not meddle with that
of other people. 5 This man wants to know
( 184 )
whether you would like to buy some old weapons.
6 If you fall out of that window, I think you
will certainly break your neck. 7 Where is my
inkstand? I think the coolie is cleaning it.
8 Where does this tram-car go to ? It stops near
the Palace. What is the fare ? One fuang.
9 Shall you go to the races with him to-morrow ?
Yes, and I hope to win some money there.
10 I think the servant has drunk all the whisky
and stolen my best cigars as well.
Exercise 62.
Read and Translate into English.
2 L?i m^ w LiJu sjt lI™ nu iHu itm i\m m im
3 m w. Lilu imm vi'iu mi m s:; usn piijj pigijj -^f^
iliJ
4 vi'iu ra '^t fi mm mu ^li^'^vt^ L-ai m liJu qu im
u
jj m m, w m ej viu^ ej m !d^ vn mn mi^ uu
U 11
( 185)
vigL?r LLIX Lai
11 T T
Lllu LLli
7 3ii m^ m QQfi liJ LLOT vta ? m vinu ilpi ta 1?^
JJ1 Lq uuu [m m ra -^^ aan liJ [a.m
8 U1U llifinI IsJ ttn vn mu iilu t iJqnm mIq ? s:; trai
lin'jji L^a e;Q^ ?njj ou un udg
9 im vnu m vn amviuu vn m m L?m uu m uia^y
LMfvi wtmi an
Exercise 63.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Have you been using my razors to sharpen
pencils ? If so you had better buy me some new
ones. 2 Has the washerman brought back my
white suits ? He has brought four suits only,
sir. 3 Look ! there is a mad dog. Get your
gun and shoot it before it bites anyone. 4 Tell
( 186 )
the carpenter to make me a table two yards long-
and four feet wide. 5 He cannot speak Siamese
well, because he has never learnt properly. 6 I
told you to buy a packet of matches, not one box
only. 7 Who is that man ? He is a trader.
What is he selling ? He sells diamonds and pre-
cious stones. 8 The roads are very dusty ; it
would be better if they were watered a little.
9 I want to go to Paknampho, which is the best
way to get there ? you had better go by train.
10 Tell the coachman not to forget the lamps, as
it will be dark before I return.
Exercise 64.
Read and Translate into English.
1 m nnjLL^ u iiJu ^n nojLi'^ a^l? ? m lu nm m
2 L^n umj^ m m w 'Bth ? Ltan uan g'l im \i^ m
-sin itm um imu mis l^b l'oi u
3 nm m m u m L?ii?i mi t. m mu mu ifiiu su
1 ll
vm 121 vn m ra
( 187 )
4 m imi m mm m 'Qzh m ? trai s^ m m
II t f
[.mr, Qu u Lilu qIj Lfii?i nm vm m}^ am mj
5 Y\ m im am "am am iv\m tnu fn iliiu 111 y\
T
mm
8 untJLU^^aLiinuvifE]? tiJfii LanmraliJLrapimj
9 mu'tnlpii'U'afjflviu ? mmt mum 'nmm
10 uiLJ <h m Q^ ^nlv^ mu^ liJ im ]\itmw mj st ifw
m^itiium^m'im
Exercise 65.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Do you know if there are any houses to let
in this street ? No I do not. 2 That tree is the
largest I have ever seen in Bangkok, but I have
( 188 )
seen larger trees in England. 3 If you want to
know the time you had better ask a policeman,
or buy a watch. 4 Where did the servant put
the sugar ? I think he put it in that cup-board.
5 What is the price of that diamond ring ? 600
ticals. That is too dear, have you any cheaper
ones ? 6 They tell me that a new school will be
opened in Bangkok on the 10th of next month.
7 Tell the coolie to buy a new lamp chimney ; he
had better take the broken one as a pattern. 8
This tramcar is very slow, why must it wait so
long at each passing place ? 9 I shouted to the
boatmen to stop, but they did not hear me. 10
If you go for a walk during the rainy season, you
had better take your umbrella with you.
Exercise 66.
Read and Translate into English.
mu '^t ndii 3J1 sin m irii im 1? ? vr\ iipif "sm
1 T
mj fiiny mm m '^z ndij m lu m mu upif m^
( 189 )
2 L5n jj in ra v\w ^ijj t mw m w liJu llcjo €1
m J] L21 QtJin 's:; Tiu lu irau u mi nng qt
1511 St LQT Jim Lm^ un
3 mi "^ Vi'mu LQT jiJ mw mi unlw'mi lin^vi?!] ? vi'iu
u
IwQIPl L^EJU LQ^ VTJQ ? If^'^LH?! mi fi JlJ mW ^IJJ S^
u
nil ^mi mu miu mm
V
4 vjiljj vi'nu lii lai viu^aa 2!]^ mulg^uu ra'lu
MfKi ju uan m "tju Lu ptq^ nu I'D vi uiu mjn m'^t
LSI b Ifl uu
5 L^u VI 'jiu Lpi Lvi un uiu m^ m \,i\i m b vijj?i liJ
am viiu un dn tan '^z m mIq LiJdn ^ '^z m lif mi
6 Eji wFifj u vii ra (nu viQjn QLi'ivi 1? ? vii mi m vioji
™viu^ ^simil^'^LQiuisiniJnYiFi wjJn uiu urn
mi Iffl^ m? u] nm u ^im ^1 m
7 ^ti lii f 4n Piu uu mu 0Uin st pfu LhtJ nu 1,511 vm
LLP) riau mu I3J li^"^ "euj lst ii liJu piu 1«^ ^ rnn m
\i7jmmmm'\m
( 190 )
111 I'd' ™ m in^ fiTulu' ^^ ila m\\A iumi iim m
11
9 u Ira Vni 31^ m -^nn ui^ tiqjj m?!] ? mi lu' vi?nu
LLiH mi IpT l^uu 'S(?iviin^ ?nu -tiijij cJnn liJ fw L!ai
10 mJ fh vihu 3Jin Lin -^r w ?n^d^ llh viiu
Exercise 67.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 Last night I saw two snakes in the road
in front of my house, one of them was black.
1 think it must have been a poisonous one.
2 During the hot weather you should not eat so
much meat ; it is better to eat fish, if you know
that it has just come from the sea. 3 This curry
is not hot enough. Tell the cook to put about
three times as many chilies in the next one he
makes. 4 In Siam we never have any snow, but
they say that hail fell once about five years ago.
5 Look how dark the sky is growing ; I think we
shall have a heavy thunderstorm this evening.
( 191 )
6 Walking is not- pleasant, in the streets of
Bangkok, because most of them are rather nar-
row, and there are so many carriages and rick-
shaws. 7 If you cannot buy me a box of those
cigars at that shop, go to the hotel and ask them
if they keep them there. 8 Why are all those
people dressed in white ? They are going to a
cremation at the temple near your house. 9 The
thief who stole my hat, has received three
month's imprisonment. ] Where did you find
that umbrella ? I found it on my verandah yes-
terday. Does it belong to you ? If so you had
better take it away with you.
Exercise 68.
Read and Translate into English.
L!ai Vi'um mmfi vm ^ m w w^ m Im In Im
m m dal'^lM^mi mm mm lij Viid^ l"^ lim
mi s" nmi llIu imm 1'^ m\
( 192 )
m mnz w\i uan ra VliJia nil m in
3 viiu ndg q^I?? Lildi i/inlu mu % viiPi m imm
im\fn mi u LiJdn •mjlii' liJu q^I? uin liJu llpi
Lm:; LSI '=^t Lilu ™ y anui'^^i uin
5 ttia u miu m mn m mi \^\)1 iJ?:;l¥ifi o^nqH
L21 '^" nmi L^Q 1? ? mj Id j'lli! LL(?i 'mj m
u
J] 131 ra s:; m i uu Sn ^sq^^ ^ ndi
u
6 S \m^ ann? Jn ^ nuu lwji:; im "nm Ij ?liJ in I •
iim sin u'l m^ uiu u mu lmu q^Ij ? iildn lmu
L^n ?injj Piu Kimz m ml im m
11
7 ^ iJjtniFi 'tiui v\m i^ m m t tJi mi ii mu m?
L^nl3ilM'f=l'c]^ t U Lllu QU aii^
8 lUQ mau nau u ej3j li^ m ljjqsI mn im l^i h liJ
imiz im q^Ij ? LVJjr [.m g'l cjjj lu' ?iui^
? T
( 193 )
y lu iJj"LYi(^ fl^nr|H mi t itan ml uii tan ra m iilu
Squ nm m mi m qi lu :3J Ira lsi jji lu unu uu
m LQ14 w EJ jij L'Di mn u m mi •aa^ \m mm '^t
!1 li
10 inu Yi t mm m m\i lu' fiaii^i ?aij »] uu n ^ wfa
iriu ^ LSI lu' iiz Tim l^mn m nm t w im
r u
Exercise 69.
Translate into Siamese.
1 To-day it is raining hard, I suppose Mr.
Jones will not come to visit us this afternoon.
He said that it was quite possible that he would
not come if it were to rain. 2 Tom has no spare
time to finish your work ; you must finish it
yourself. Do not waste any more time, but
begin at once. 3 What shall you do with all the
money that you won at the gambling house last
night ? I think I shall take it to gamble with
again to-night. You are very foolish, you will
( 194 )
lose it all if you go there again. 4 In Siam
there are many tin mines especially in the Malay
Provinces. Most of the miners are Chinamen,
but the mines belong to European Companies.
5 Did you hear that his wife died last night ?
No I have not yet heard about it, what did she
die of? The doctor said that it was typhoid fever.
6 Those houses are very old and dirty but they
will be pulled down next week. Will they be re-
built ? I really cannot tell you. 7 The mice
have eaten all the cheese that I bought yester-
day. To-morrow I shall buy a good mouse-trap.
8 Are there many patients in the new hospital ?
The doctor told me that, at present there were
twenty-seven, but that none of them were
seriously ill. 9 Where can I buy a pair of spect-
acles ? I do not think you can buy a pair to suit
you in Bangkok ; you had better order a pair
from London. 10 Yesterday evening, when I
returned home, I saw that a table cloth had been
taken away from the dining-room, I asked the
servant whether he knew who had taken it, but
he did not know anything about it.
(195)
Exercise 70.
TRANSLATE INTO SIAMESE.
1 When you go to the market, be sure not to
forget to buy all the different things which I
have told you to buy. 2 This book is very small,
I want a larger one. Have you any about one
foot square with good paper and a ruled
margin ? 3 Do you ever smoke Siamese cigars ?
No I find they are much too strong for me, I
prefer to smoke cigarettes. 4 What is the name
of this flower ? It smells very sweet. It is very
similar to a kind of flower I have seen in
France. 5 In Bangkok there are many Indians
who sell cloth and other things in the street.
Do you ever buy from them ? Yes I have
bought a few things, but they charge very high
prices. 6 Yesterday I ate some ice cream, I
think it must have been made from canal water,
as I am feeling very ill now. Please go and
fetch the nearest doctor at once. 7 Do you
ever bet on horse races r' Yes I sometimes bet
a small amount, but have very rarely been able
to pick a winner. 8 I should be much obliged if
(196)
you would kindly lend me your newspaper,
when you have finished reading it. 9 This lamp is
very dim. Why did you turn it down so low ? I did
not turn it down I think there is no oil left in it.
10 Let us call a carriage and go for a drive.
Where shall we go ? I think it would be pleasant
to listen to the military band which plays in
front of the barracks.
(197 )
EASY CONTINUOUS PASSAGES FOR
TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH.
Exercise 71.
11
m jjin Tu v\m t um m^ m v\m h nrih m m m
11
m v\'m m aivn? L2n m im n?:;Liii lu uu qi^ b uu Lfiia
1^
m v\m imt Ltai Vi'm m ivrm an ra v\m i^ m % im
11
' ' "1 m nu m urn lsi raa^ mm If
lua LSI m nu m LLfiQ lsi raa^ mm m in lai L'^u m
0ivn? d iiivi eTl^u vn^ m m gi mlu ^^ a uivi m aivn?
11
"smm la um/i lti'i uuIu'I'd' mIq L-^n *aa^lama ran gi
^' ^^ f u(?i' m uii riKLili 2Q3 n'lu lu uu vrnm \m an fiu
viu^ Lv^re nnili uu m m tma" u im m^ m m n
II II
fjau li/f lIu 6. vm uu lle^ w^ mm m lif" Piu au V\ m
11
™ viui^ gV'in I mj J?j ilu maivii? ?iwij x\r.ih 'hmm
11.
LLeU Lmr ^uu w^h m^ m\rjm mu'' l31 V iim
( 198 )
njtLiii iLfi LQi 5IUJJ m Ijf Lin m^ qjqli qu «] m<i •] la lu
mmt, Ivinj Tin ra uan '^in l^^ sq^ lamt^ f=iu mm
Exercise 72.
QU VlU^ LQfll L'D^ fi Un LJ^U to PIU ^^ lli Iih'jJI Ij^ lIuU
Tiu Fi? Vtlm ufi Lmu Tw to m m mn g'n "i\i\ii jjiIjJ
viii " un um m t m^ m V wm liJu qu 3Jin m ^
Lajj-a rill nil un mu m t m^ un lI^u fiu t Pijaaulli
ran g'l '' EJ3J uau vimi m w fii LLn m tiu ii m titoIiJ
u
iJ?:;lt)fi JlnJ im l^q ujj li^^'Su l^lj^ r\mi iim In mu
im un g'n liJu Litio it^m -am lIqIvJ " w SpiqijjwqIs liJu
u
Qu inn lu m? yi un lj^u fiu uu li^ m im^ u Lm m m
f^^ IviH un un um m m hi % Vi' mn un lIiiu piu 1\
m^ ii ^'toiIjj lq^ 111 sV' un tltiu uulu' f ii '^t m\]
II
sdi^ 1j im L31 m q'i '^t im im V^imm n°ii ifw lim
untrau Fiu ^ v\m lwx ^uu isili^'^rau di ejjj ray ?i^un
imu f=lU U llJ lIb IiaI "30 fll"
( 199 )
Exercise 73.
•iii viii^ i\ "Din Piu v\w i^ mi iviaa m liJ itw lIq
Tiii imu Tim L31 v\mu m mu m ilr imi m Vim 4]
Tfi Iw^Lfii?! f=iau IviQJ =] Piu lu lIq n fi mm nm iH^ ti
V[m rni f\'iu m v\m ^lii ndi lj^!j jji m mi cT'dili piu
mu mi Q1 '• ui L?!] m u -^jj l^ej ut^ m m m ?im "^t liJu
fnviij Vi'ilm m wm m j] )\m s:; nu Ipij n'au " uiej
flQU PIU uu n U1Q1J di '' ]\m i^ LiJu iJt^n -^^trij^t m ^" fiu ra
30^ "jiu n'au llIu llu llpi ]lm i wn nu 30^ araii pki -=^1^ nu
ravinuri^u"
Exercise 74.
u 'siu P!u viUsi ^vi llIu piu i^u m m t mm mi^
inn m v\m itai l^^^^u mm aa^ I'ai i piu 2^ liJu piu m n
u u
ujjIjj Vlmu ifi'iu n'au mix "ii viiu liJu piu mu llti '^"
( 200 )
inm v\m vi q^ nu 'm im^ v\m '^ im Ljj L^ to ^iu m
u ?im LV11 rfu nil d^ Lvim m m v\m''
Exercise 75.
vi'iu w \i i\m
30^ Ltan 111 m qi l31 liJu !j ^ uni jjin n^i jjuhIj
U ft? ?
an ^ lultin LSI S vim m v\m filta liIu t/iq^ gii 2^:;
Mu^ lu inn "] %. imx 'mu tan m m^ fi Yifvjfj mn
In LfsajQ iJT:;LmQ lai un ^u lli qi ffi l!3i liJu imh^
L^u'3 nl^ <^z iilu m? ^ ^ mm ^ v\m ih ^^mii im di^:
LiJu mj ^ vmiii m «iii viiu taa^ lji l^li L^a '=):; Iman la ina^
^^adlulfa^ taa^vi'iu iTuaan liiilil'viui?! lwi^^'i min ainn'^:;
LiJuLFuyl m i\m "ai vinu -aa^ m l^ej iwa -^j^IIpT lanla'T/ia^
i^ ti m lu fia^ viiu iIu L^tj li^ mjji^ w m nm u '^z f\
viralij" itu nlli jjasjlw iiJu m? ^ im m lli ^'n vm
(201 )
m mi \.m lSb l^t 7\ \\i m^ vnu m 1*01 to m^ fi mm
L^u l'^ fim t m mT]z gi j]m "hm vhu i?fQ iTu liIu adi^
imi m m\]\ Ltan nliilUls iiJu ra^ §n liJu mi ani^
Exercise 76.
iJinj^ lij fin
vim?j li m LOT ^ nf=ii Ij'J v\m m lu n?^ naupiau lsi
51!]^ ^H? mj LiJuf=iu aiviutjg llt/T'] guviu^ im Lai nid^ ra-^
inoj^ ■Tim m7 m imim fi '^iuqulIu mmux & ]lm^
s!?i lif lu uinj2 LiJu m luq Imluq nu Lfiua L^ai Vniu
L^i^EJU gn ''lIuu 4iu ^ivifii a^l? piq^l^u^ llij^to sio mlii
m Ijj ' ' mm li^'^i^iau gi ' ' LLug Lvim uu fi lii^luaif liJu
m mf] LIT lIlj^ mi lo'^ivifii 4ii viu I "^t m l™^ nra
11
m^ =] luviiLi vi3Ji?i " iTmm mA'il wmi^^'iiu m u 1111
t O II
1 u
uu
( 202 )
Exercise 77.
S><1
iw lim vip cj PI
uvi^^ m v\m t LUjg ^m inn \m v\m i^ lst t mm
fh jjin gii Mu^ LLJjg m mi liJ 1^ Ldu lu fiiu 'sm inti piu
Mu^ wIjJ iiqu LL3jg m^ Ltanli^^tan tu m m lluq ra \i]M
Bu 3Jin lai Via lto^ Hfi vii] m^ m im Viian
II
LWflu aa^ 1211 vit^iLi Piulw^sii vru mu mu v\m ^m L!B1 41)
l^^Mu Mj^iD m uv\m m uu Vtan m \m m lu viu^
11 II 3 c7
LLfi m i.ai m m Lu viu viw3J^ isi m ?)^ Fiura Lm tan viu
11
t mu iim Miu t [7\ m im am m miu m uu
lu UU 111 V! inu -aa^ um yi Ir
t im w Lnm(^ VIU wm mu iwnt nuu Lsiaa^j lljjqIi^*^
L^Liu m lim LU?j uul'fuu mli m m iJrmFi qi S ^ "sm
^"^m^u m LiJu aa^ nnuu tSa Piul^a^li^TLan mu uu ui
I' 11
^ u^u itu w^ mu m mil^its!] m m n n'ttim aan
II
v\m iTi fi mm Pinls jjin tm li^'^fa^l^'Liu^ m m
( 203 )
th\ m 'nm TiWm liJu "am am liJ^uu mi mu"
Exercise 78.
ml? [.v\m im
pi?^ v\m jj m Ldu n^ m wAm iy\in mi mu uan
ml? "■ ""
H A A > A ^ \ A iJ
m^ n "Dig iHu uan lu ^im uu in ^ mm. nti vit^i^ f=iu
ifia Lai li^'^idu xn mx\ iLiJan =] sa^ am am^ LailpT^mii
'DHQ uiu uflfi ™ viu<i QT " mi as m 0^ viiu an !g vm ' '
niQ iHu ^xm n tjaii Im^l^t ^u piu idu nn uu ViiJmu
m uu IvTliJu lIu ijiti viu^ \m iw m uivi uu l-f uu iPir
Ijj 'Dig ijiu uan Piu uu "kmm 'diq iHu uan Vmu h\
'^ u a^ im Eju wla " fiu lHu nn i?iaij qi ^' €^ I aa ?°ij "
mg iliu uan piu uu n vm lIu uiifiuuMunniliLi^^v^pigi
II
'' tri LiJu am^ uu cju ^aau Lai lIupiji taa^ eju Lmg u ^ngi
Lwaviiu s^l^'^liiSlaniF! t 'x, LiJ^fjulw^Lilu a| an ^ viu^ "
( 204 )
Exercise 79.
Jijmw Tim Km \.\.m
u u u
m ui^ mi mi mi r\l qi mu mi ju nulu izvm^ wm Ltan
LLfi mf] Qiiu JJJ m vi:;Lt^ am im an ui^ m mu 'oi^ia^u
jil gi St ra^ ni? ilu mil ^'1^ tatju ?iJ pihu ^'n r. m^
m? m m uivi "an ui^ ^imw uu IjJ muli^'^ilu mi uirt
T
11 ? u
mm iim w ui^ S pmu iJj:vit^ni?i 1-^ In mi t JilmiAi mi
T U
?\im 1(^EJ m L!ai \i''m vn a'n^ laiiu i]\ llh ubh lii^l Jil
I] II
II
jiJnivi "hw TCLfi LLra liu " 'an m^li^Tmu an di '' wm Lian
( 205 )
i im ^ rfu rill wm ai?ij uu m ^\m" immi ?i] rau
■in " v^gn LL!an mi m liJ im Vim am i\.f\ mr\ aifii Pin ui
?
Exercise 80.
mi m imu mii Im
tlnm am m^u to^iiJiIfi t m m yiiu m v\w m
1
Tin Lv^iJi" ^im m uiLi wvifn^ '^rliljifi aan !g Iw^Ltan [-an
'^t m\)\ L^LJ ma 's:;13j'1m'ui^ Kv\mu mj S pi™ ?^
if\m Yin ^ m li^'^QQn 0| liI'Lai im Piu aa mu Piu mi
n l^'^jJi Y\ Inim mi raliJ llyiu vin m m v\m t mu m
1
v\m uan di '' iili mu miWm i^ m mm mm imiz
mIbIjJ ivmt nil! llIu 0"1? " ™ aa vnu qi l21 liIt tad^lu
LiJu im mu mu LLcf] i^^Li d"^ m mj ^^ di "ImiJu art?
uu amn ''^it w^ " Piu w niu Piau dn " m am^ mi cjjj mi
( 206 )
U 1
mi] li ma vnlvi m bbh q^ m eju pi mi vi st mm u pmu
Exercise 8i.
L|,3J'] •aa^ U1U wm
lirTfl^ piiil'irlM'L'ai lufl dfi iteupfviu^ uilw^Lmonu L'^fii Lin
vin n gu t Pi' LLjjg m uu cjau ad l?iuq gu mu^ uiu yimu
linn nM'm vm di " la^ Viai Lua unlmLU'] nu inn 'Ki
mu m m Vila dm ' ' f^iu I'a^rau gi " uu lai ui Iw^Lfiua
!aa JiJ " \m wm nlu' i^a L2in un di Piul^'^in'^miJ lIu
Hi mal'f raa mm lai luauu jjinu L^Liia3 miT, 'mixm
yivnjli^''^"^ Fiul'a^iaT mi^ m ma a^in '^:;f'iiLLUQ mm t\
iliviun LYi'il? ifiaViK m \xm m m\ i'Mm. am m
m t\ uiviun dn ilaui^f l^li^ piuito'ijan "Ji " i^ 5 safij cju
( 207 )
Exercise 82.
Is j!][?i i?ig -^in Qumnii
urn 34 ll
uan-^n WQn sum 34 ipij ti uu^i im^ u luui^ilj^ lwjx
li muliJ L^tJQ m3J ill )htim'i I'Mim ik mi iln ™ fin
e^^ g<i m 3Jn L!fln fi u^i i.'30i via s:; lu uu m IsT ivn uu
n™ vi3JiiiS '^t mm m sa^i^ai L^iVmLi m um ui?!
MU1 ill n IjJ liJ sin lf=iii m Ijf mi iJj:;imQ L-an li^^^^i^i gn
St ra^ Liii t m mw LWQ vijjn ilnVSu li^^ il uu m
n viulil im v\m Lit^ % ndi] iHuVlm s^m
( 208 )
Exercise 83.
m v\m iitJ^m v\m t\]\ L^Ln mu Uiu uan im
121 mm a jH 111 fi tJu m Ivinj tan Vlmu laim Lsn. ']
™ ad ^ ut vif^n^ fiu mn: im u L-^fi "aa^ la Jfi uan 'in
D ?
v\m TO m 3J ui^ mu vi u fiu u In m " ej i?i piu uu n
im ill mvia^ aifjivifn taadaLmuu \.m Laimia jjiu^qejiJj:;
Lilii Qu jjin iSb l!Q1 u mi \\^m m im Lmg u fiu lmu
■ii n^ lIu iim w mu im iim 1m mnz]^^ llwti m
m lu fiKLili lIq 5iq^ mi m vr\ tJu lu' m\m\ mi m
"^z nefijliJ vn ™ mj iwx ^ luij^f ad lu uu liJu m mn
m mih n ^ mi ra^lil vn m i\m m L^m dni'j " piju
lSb Piu mmiu mm uu li^^'aan liJ m m lIu lu mi u
1 ti
^ piu mi w m imhilQim im miM'inm um m^ f\
^ m LTOX im ii mm wi^ -urn lanlii m? ^ Vlj^'ilIq^
Invin ^^^ra NumilM^yt^
( 209 )
Exercise 84.
un LLra lin tau
1
b J, u A
un LLng m uu liJu un m'W] uin m mn nttm lli mu
im Ivi m m mm mil am^ f=iu !j ^ ^^ '^z m^ "niu w
II II
ung uu Lwnt "in iiul^ fii vimu Lfiija lailu' amn '^"sm
mrit lailli ia un imQ uu jim im^ lst m gi '^:; f^a^
viijj un Ling uu Ifi Ivi v^?i vitjiu an m liJ ut^i 1^ un Lim
u
W!?i arl? lij ?i3JPigj Lai n lai un Ifi lu via^ ad lli fiu m n
U II f I
gu viu^ im un LLng aii lu m^ 1^ m uu m n iwu Llj:;i?ini
L r II
^^ LLi?i m LL3jg !aa^ tj ^ piuuu iia^ lKi 3ji wliu nui Ling n
ua^ ^ LLug m m im^ m lu g'l "a Ltjjg a lljj] 'nn w
II 11 r
La'jllil^ m miM Lvifiau mj vifa "
Exercise 85.
un LLng viui mu
mv\m y un LLng m m^ i liJu ■^m im mn gu v\w
im mlu m^ m m m t auu aiaEJ h aii m^ inim
II II
1^ ^a iju m^ m m^ tauu uu m im nl?iu mi lii\l
( 210 )
Lm ItaI n tvifj'au'm l^u v\m mu v\m m !j v\m u li?i mn q't
un Lira m\ii fi !aii m m lv^jx iw Qm>3lj lst 20^ un
lira mil L?iiJ0 'j'l '' Lwrx mj m im ta^lutj tauu a™ ^ "
igm ^ un iLralli 9u m u mj S raiu mu llIu mi uin tu
li
vi& fi Ej ^ LLfi n Fiu v\m m m lsi ^a^ un Lira i^fn 1211
li Lili?i viu-^n miiij un am n lwu ^pir wi Ej ^ Ltn n tju
mu m uu £iu ia^ imn mu limmm^wii ''mm imra
mu ™ uu im LQEJ ! im lpili °a:;liiLj mu nmum imm m
Exercise 86.
mi im ilu m
]l7ti\m fhu lI 3J1 Lim fi 'o'l^ tvi^n ?)0^ piu i m^ m
liJ Ml ^iu ^ilu iJr'jR aLJjfm L^Q L21I1I til ilu n Id fi
dn LvilLinj viw L!an TOfiQ^li^rRTi ^ ss mi lIu mu m? 'iimi^i
Qdn-3 u urn T\\^m\n lIb m 20-3 im itu w n\i'm
m mu w^ m^ mu mi mi lbi uMiJ iiiu ^ lAiammtam
yi 'y lAiQ m uu S PiQiii iaiqIs f '^t m um Ig'i'iPii do mum
( 211 )
iQ^^i r\m^ m mM'm til l^!j '^n mu mm m\i m . at]
Exercise 87.
m? Su ill
gii v\m mm ^u Pin Ivinj inu Lira jji ^ iHu •aa^ 'unti
1^1 tfeii 210^ LSI im uan dn " sslil'mi mi in w^ mu #1
mm ' ' ui?j [^1 n Im^lst Sjj liJ imx m m uiu m lii
smn '^tlil LTO mu v\m mu am^ul^im in m m m
m im isTaa-^ m m m m v\m n du m Ivinj' an inLi
m nliJ iHu MM} LW ma ^q^ w aa^ Ltan tSa uiej m m
h mi uiu am L2n iaili mu am m in m xiiu m vfm qt
' ' mu s^liJ li^u lai in "am m uu m Ww. Ln[^ ' ' uiu
( 212 )
[m mil Qi '■ sj:; q^Ij mj m^ m? in m u lviSbu mi
am vm mu mh^ u l^it tnu an di " mi n liJ f '^" m
wih " ui^ Lira rau 'Jn "1^1 iviflau mj f liJ w in '^m
piu 9U mm f=m viu^"
Exercise 88.
dim m^ un "aujj
PIN Vim n u im mi it\ I1J lu m "aitj suuini lmu fi
t\m nu taujj v!uiJj:;jjim^n m viu^ m li^'^tlm i4km mm
aJ 2^ aJ fi^J.
ini^ m 210 Jii " eTl^u yii^ raii di " tfi adi^ mi "auu au
li
u ^m LiJu 3UJJ ^ mii Vim It" lu uai n'au m 1^ ini?i in
(213 )
Exercise 89.
T]m im LHuliJ
f=l?<l MU^Ura 3!]^ U I?l f=lU mj^ L'^LI ;jin LLJJ L31 m
vn viuQ ^ fl la L^!j^ m mm m m uu IjJ fi ilin uu
n vntj LL3i aa^i ['hiVi' liJ lSejjj Mua f=iu uu ^ iriu lsi
uan vijjQ'ii ''lu nu ^ viua 1^*^ mm Mm 'am ^ mi vnfj
^ mi fi f=i']nu wn 1'^ mi^ im ^ mi I3J mm qt '^:; 1m'
ffil? Lilu ?i^#i ^ ?iumj LLfi viiu ^ mi m m fiw aasi viua
^30 WBm LiJji?i ?u m im'^iiiui]^ <imm Ltiu lavi mn
m]} g'l " i^ 30^ L^n =] ^lu' S jimlu' iilu mhi rw vi hz
-^'itj m mn 11m wi^ uld fi3jnQ? ifiii " tTviffl^ m uu
nlras LLfi fn3J di V13JQ '^:; Lai lIu LTi'i It viuq (?iai] qi
L-ai pra^ ni? lIu cjioo uiTfi iiJu Hi jtimt im uu viitj tTviffi^
l^'^Llil?! TO LLfl ll^^^ra LSI SUOT QU L^^T ll^LLn WU LLf^
?
L2n lan suura an en au uu m b Lu ™ in Lai L^ Lai Ifs h
lu n?:;Lili urn n m nmi liJ
( 214 )
EASY CONTINUOUS PASSAGES FOR
TRANSLATION INTO SIAMESE.
Exercise 90.
There was once a poor man who had never
been to school when he was young, and he
wanted very much to be able to read. He had
seen an old man who lived near his house
reading all day long with spectacles. Therefore
he thought that spectacles would enable a man
to read. He went to a shop and asked for a
pair of spectacles. He tried them on and then
endeavoured to read a book which he had
brought with him, but he found that he could
not read it ; so he told the shopman that these
spectacles were not the right kind, and asked to
try on another pair. After trying on every pair
in the shop still he could not read the book.
The shopman said that he did not believe he
could read at all. The man replied " Of course
I cannot, do you think I should want spectacles
if I could " ?
(215)
Exercise '91.
A gentleman in India, one morning dis-
covered that a valuable ring had been stolen
from his room. He asked all his servants but
they all said that they did not know who had
taken it, so he said that he would have to use
magic to find out the thief. He told his
servants to stand in a row and said that he
would repeat certain words and that the thief's
turban would catch fire. He muttered a few
words and stamped his foot on the ground.
One of the servants snatched off his turban and
threw it on the ground. By this means the
gentleman discovered who had stolen the ring.
Exercise 92.
A wealthy gentleman who was fond of
good living and had for years been abusing his
stomach, at last found his health so bad that he
consulted a celebrated doctor. He stated his
case so clearly that the doctor could not mistake
the nature of the disease. "I can cure you"
( 216 )
said the doctor, " if you promise to do just what
I tell you. " The gentleman said that he would
be sure to do so, whereupon the doctor told him
that he must steal a horse. The gentleman was
very surprised. ' Yes' said the doctor "you must
steal a horse, you will then be arrested, tried,
and convicted, and you will be placed where
your food will be such that in a short time your
health will be perfectly restored."
Exercise 93.
Yesterday I went out for a walk. I met a
friend of mine whom I had not seen for many
years. I was very surprised to see him; but at
first he did not seem to be able to recognise me.
We went and had dinner together at the hotel
where he was staying. He told me that since I
had last seen him, he had been farming in
Canada but had lost the greater part of his
money. He asked me to help him to find some
employment, but I told him it would be very
difficult to find a vacant post just then. How-
( 217 )
ever a week later he received information that
he had inherited a considerable fortune-from his
uncle, who had died a week or two previously.
I was glad to hear that, and hoped he would
remain prosperous for the rest of his life.
Exercise 94.
Two gentlemen travelling in Scotland, once
stayed for the night at a small inn. In the
morning they were rather surprised that one of
them was charged two shillings for his horse,
but the other was charged one only. They
asked the innkeeper why different prices were
charged. The innkeeper replied that the
horse belonging to the first gentleman had a
long tail, and therefore it could easily drive
away the flies while it was eating ; but that as
the second gentleman's horse had a short tail,
it could not drive away the flies so easily, and
hence could not eat so much, as it often had to
withdraw its head from the manger.
(218 )
Exercise 95.
A gentleman dining at a hotel, at which the
servants were too few for the work, sent one of
them who was only a boy to fetch a plate of
beef. After a long time the lad returned and
the hungry gentleman asked him if he was the
same boy whom he had sent to fetch the beef.
The lad replied in the affirmative. " Dear me."
said the gentleman, ' ' how you have grown to
be sure."
Exercise 96.
Two friends who had not met each other
for some years chanced to meet again, and so
greatly had they changed in appearance, that at
first they did not know each other. During
these years the one had grown very stout,
whilst the other, who had been seriously ill, was
very thin and pale. When at last they re-
cognised each other the stout gentleman said
' ' Why Tom you look as if you had not tasted a
dinner since I saw you last?" "And you"
replied the thin gentleman, " look as if you had
been at dinner ever since."
( 219 )
Exercise 97.
" I shall work in my field to-morrow " said
a lazy farmer, ' the season is advancing, and I
shall have no rice if I do not work." Next
morning however he received an invitation to
dinner and accepted it saying ; ' ' One day is of
no consequence". On the following day he could
not work as he had eaten too much and had a
bad headache. ' ' To-morro^^' I will make up for
this" he said, but on the morrow it rained The
next day was fine, but his buffaloes were sick, and
the following day was a holiday. Thus day
after day passed and nothing was done, until
the season for sowing was over, and when
harvest time came, he had nothing to reap. |
Exercise 98.
An elderly gentlemen was well known for
his kindness to children. One afternoon he was
picking up an orange in his own garden, when
he saw a small boy sitting on the wall. The boy
did not know that the old gentleman was the
owner of the garden, and he said he would show
( 220 )
him a tree which had much better oranges on it
than the one he had seen him pick up. *'But"
said the boy " We must take care that the old
man does not see us. " The gentlemen went with
the boy and together they stole a dozen of his
own oranges.
Exercise 99.
A Frenchman newly arrived in London, left
his hotel one morning, to see the town. In
order to find his way back, he copied on a card
the name painted on the wall at the corner of
the street. After walking about all day he
called a cab and showed the driver the card.
But the cabman only laughed at him. At this
the Frenchman grew angry, and called to the
passers by. A crowd soon collected and every
one laughed loudly when they read the card.
Soon a policeman came along and the Frenchman
thought that now he was sure of help. But the
policeman only roared with laughter when he
read the card. At last a gentleman stopped to
( 221 )
see what the matter was, and as he could speak
French, the matter was all explained. The ad-
dress which the Frenchman had so carefully
copied at the corner of the street was ' ' Stick
no bills".
Exercise 100.
A boy once went into a baker's shop to buy a
two penny loaf, and when he received it, he
thought it was rather small, so he remarked to
the baker that it was not of the right weight.
"Oh never mind that" said the baker "it
will be the less for you to carry." " Very well ''
said the boy, and giving three half pence to the
baker, he went out of the shop. The baker
called after him and said that he had not given
him sufficient money.
" Oh never mind that" said the boy " it will
be the less for you to count."
( 222 )
NEWSPAPER CUTTINGS,
NOTICES Etc.
From the " Siam Observer."
JV. B. — These Exercise from 101-115 are put in as
examples of ' ' Journalistic ' ' Siamese.
e.)
Exercise 101.
m \^ wiM QT iim m m ™ mn mim f\ m
LTO^^nu LL^Q mm m m. m m m 1?^ ubu uiu mi
rai3j ?iu^ mw mil hm mn mi vii u'l f\ m'i^ m ^ mn
A A ci <u ^iJ ij 1 A
wif]^ m m m v\m m s:; -^u m miu =] m lst hi i/i
Exercise 102.
( 223 ;
T
-^in n?<i imtim fSLun lu tu u iim
Exercise 103,
Lfiaou fi d L^QU u urn mlli m in iiu m i mm
mMivm m mum m ^11 uiu mi^i in^c^i. nij m ra^tgu
T/i:^Lni:; ffu taT^ ?iifi #1 1'S' lqi ui?i wu n??tji ^n m ru m
mu^immm.
Exercise 104.
f3j fiuu L'^^Fnjn?^ w llfi m\\i mm mi liJ fki raan Lssg
( 224 )
1m] iTu im u l^i lAiun^ijlli m im vm imlval st m m
LLmufimiJjSu^jjin
Exercise. 105.
\m\^ 1m m sin jci™ viu^ im still m luu {wlqu Lm
lNfi1[?l4^lmmSQSU Jtll^m 30^ UHLJ ']^ S^lli IQU mill
lu m m v\m tm fiai^i 1^1 IlI lu la jei ih lii^ an fw ?)q^
^1-3 an 3n>3 viu^ m^a m m lvii ad fia^ m Lvn uu untJQ^
t aimj Mun iiin LL!?i iiw im )M innij 'jt ma i^ im mi m
St Lin Mui^ vniatj
( 225 )
Exercise 106.
itm TAi u imi lIt t m % m v\t^ um mu m lu
uauln Fiw ^u u mu sr ^^ slj ^ uu vifnLi ii luj ll^i liJu
u
.™ ^ m ^i3j ma^ wi^ qi iz^ u liJu ri^ i^n wm
Exercise 107.
Lwa ™ 111 w\mm imi m m i^iirnu jYiht lii ^ a?!)
Ti mm tiuu sn?g?i ui g^i Pin 3j piu im m im m im m
i?i!:;l']u m uu ^n t v\m f\7\ m m am m m n ^^ m m
#1 ^n liJ Lrau wt^ p)j:;luu n lAn ffu 111 In m #i '■^nj^^
tii^ n m ^i^liJ #1 f 1?^ mam n d^ wn i?in^i! ^ nn lito
II
( 226 )
Exercise 108.
Ill jjQirajm? lu LOT u L^i liiLM m fimu ifaEJ'] m
LfSUQ its IIU U CPiL(?lQ llJjl 1^ Un LSI JJI Qfl pfu MW lpl!J
Ljfl Lm jn am^ u Lran I'l iJpiQFimf un sin m mw i^au
Lit^i ul?i ii'] 'jnlu nw fiau rau im liJ raa ?ti uaLi?im
mf DRLrajlilil W71 dn 1 m u'n st liIu m\?\rn nil i^m
lu I'lm ihi 213J nuu t nj-3 fiBU i^isu lmxS m UQLrajm?
i^jjliJ w
L^JJ LU vi^ uu
2^ i^
Exercise. 109.
LLvi^ nu mu
im m Qiu u LQpii ilj:;jjim aa^ ™ Lni?i mi] m mlu
jtvi']i^ m mj jfi Ji^ Ivi^ nu m Im mi i ^im u'bu m
•a']i^ ai) o^j^ vn<i l^i aan viiu ?n fiu LLsn m n 39 1m it\
111 Sii L^Li fi^ lu f=iu ku ?nu Ej mj I3J Ejau lil % Lni^
LiJu iJnn im^ nu -au unu si^ m w m 71^ l'j^^i mj ae
li
31^ ui m im Lni^ Lnii^ fm Lat at lu iKi uu %^ m '=5in ju
( 227 )
liJ fic mum mu tm'fln mi lu m m li^itj ?nu i mi fii^^
v^n ui im mu ^i^ m Ipi ujj m LL-sn m lqi nHn l?i lg
ii^ m TiU mu 'DiuliJ mu T^ viu tsnliJlu m bhej un
Exercise 110.
imu site) nt^n ^q^ um iPiu fi fiu Ii?j ^n f'- 00 piu wi m
L31 iJKu inii im njtm 'am mu 1m mim mj mm inu
viuQ^ "aD \.m^ mm mm wtM m m im i^ wi liJ lli
?
a:; fiii lu ^^ ^7\ miVi ^iw mit iiJu m? unu gu LSfj
Ltm Fiu ra Ijj' i^fa^ MU lIu "dqu LLi?i ffi MU liJ (?iijj mmm
f\ m 1^ fillip lu itm otviLi u nu I'^im m ii^ "^t, m
( 228 )
LLJ^un mn •si'] iiiu fi mm mi\^ i^m ifi?^ f^n mn m
mts Lilu ^fiTiim Qim u n mi ih q^ lau urn nu tfiu ill
ui m f\ nm Isjfi^ 'sr rntfij vn mi mm moj *au m
I3J u cj 'D'g^ iIjiij iJjiu piu fi^ lu iSa^ olintj
Exercise lU.
% nil immu
^\M
iju ffu !j qi iTumi i^aj •3iu?i^ i\]u ^uuu vii/nj Lnaiifij
'^t m Qsn sin mm m lu nin Lu b Lfiau uu isi^ llpi m
Pin ft^ ffu' im Tiviu mmm ^I'Wi mn sin im^ [f\w,'^i
LviJi vi tih "Jiru: fRffe mQ u nii:mlvi '^u raLi lui
ra au mnz im im ^ ut] tJ;:;lvir '^t m m m Opi m
itm wi ^Ig'uu n m im uilu m ?\ihiiii iizut su hw
uu mi^u liTii m fjiju I3J jjau 1m oji mi Jafkaiira? 1^
mm m LQuJaraiLyiaj 1j l^u im tfjnqw lmu jfil'kj jji
( 229 )
lli iJafpiQiLviQj In^ m mf\ ti mm m mwiu ^^ m iqi
im m MM \i\ mn "^z im liJjejij Im mM u ^^ m m t?\
LQT m lSqnI qu \^ m m m m itm ififs m Im ttm^ Siiu
WM vivnj liJ in^
Exercise 112.
LJjQmiti w\m\m LOT mu ifimIj mm en. d m n
s"3Ji l™ t wzim m ?n]\m Lif^ fiu l^ ^n^lil iu ^
vli aw W\ 31^ wa unit^^ win uli l^u mj ]\^z^ Mitu m
U 11
liuvIqjjj iH^ LLf^ I3J LLPivi m m m im m wr\ uh im ^yw m
1 II
( 230 )
nu fltj w^n LL-an m !flT3 lmu L5ii ta:; at fm tiiu mi n Id
u
m Ivi Q0n liJ vlii ^in ujlm ^n 'sm \.m '^t 1^ iJi^ iJ?"pj
latj unjj m llIu piu ira iHu n aan ui -^Jin iJ?:?i pin "hii
fi^ vnn vmo n iiu m ^ m m mu mm %^ m wiu \m ti
Exercise 113.
1
m r\ ui w^ 'hum Mi iim fm t ui llIu iaIi^ imQ ifi^
u
pnti aan luq ui iloim tjidool? t ifm vm vim ilfin
II
m mu v\m v\m m ih nm vim mj ^ ui u^ Pigu m m^
tl T
LLW iJT:;yim giooo \i liJu un taIi^i im mt^ '^:; tpi 21^ m7\
(231 )
L?n 5 mj m cj [^ Jj pmu mmf\ s: tug img n m m ijj:;
u£^ Tim m VI Rif^ jJWTic^ wA'm pi? piiu mviu^ im ^n m
jim Lmi cj 50 i^Q^ ii^ ifu Gi lu ^ mx m m an Piiu
OTU uu '^:; d^ L^fn \ \m m X\ ia ffu pnn si^ pin m rm
II
ffi uli^i vimn s:; vijiij pi™ fi:;L0^i^lM III mu ui^ lu Ejn
Exercise 114.
T II
m vinij gi ra \m qu u pia m ujhvi '=5:; m ?jq3j m ljq nfi
1t/J l^u 111 m \ ma^ sa^ ura/i m 1^ lli?) i lvipi m m
m'l f^m Plan \v\ mi vii aan ]\7ZJ\ lu mm m^ mm mn
^a mm im m^ im m wmitw mu im m m^ m
lillu ma^lli
( 232 )
tfalvJ ^llilij QunjiPi u^g Ifa^ ]\rM^ piijj w mm
i\m mm m:— win^lvi it^ mm mlillm tm ufi
111 lu piiufi ^ t ira '^01^ 0fj vifiitj m m^ 5iri ffu to l?q
li/^ mi s:; m^ im mii In ^ m im \ii 1m c^n mu m
f u
Qurai^j uri ih im ra^ mi mm Ir lSh uau un man
•^z ™ ifa ai^ mm "^t m^ -nm iwa aumiu^ "aa^ ljq ai^
•^z m m w m
Jli vii^ -nm \\n im i^n iim ifa i^a^ liIu !j Hi m mu
ufavi '] s:il3J ^Q3j aunjiiFi Im im lu ma^ an m 111 iilu
au aniri
( 233 )
Exercise 115.
LL^^ mm
iifSviralv^vi'isu
Ividj mm ^ inu victi ^wjlnui tuoii suvi? ^ lab njjmmjs
eiicQd; L']fn iJiy 5 1m im •^z % ilqnm fiii m im nmii
'^rl^ m mv\m iim im iim mm ?filv^ vi'i su ^^ m'^z
Lai ^[^ ra J']JJ fm mm mli im n^a^ ufiu nauiJu mj
Ej ^a w t u^ 111 111 m ntiM m \v\ m lu iw
T/1 mtw uu l[?i
?
m nnmn am
( 234 )
EXAMPLES OF SIAMESE LETTERS FOR
TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH.
A. PERSONAL.
Exercise 116.
From a son to his father.
inii UHJ fl^
■iu t M imimi muimmm m^
aJ nJ
r\% mm um ifiu m \jm t "^z aautd Pijlli mm9\
ia mm urn ra lli iviflQu m u au lpvI
( 235 )
Exercise 117.
From father to son; answer to No. 116.
iJin mm wrm
7u t w ivmm jpiulnluvif Rfi m&
m vm TOIL
T
mi w&\ '^mvm t^vi -Ki ^ m mm u i\ f\^ vrmm
"I I '\iJ ']U V ^ T } ^ iJ ci Ifl I A A
«QU [^ PiJ m mim Ivi lai m uw rai^ "aQ^j vi Lu u lpijq^i
urn m s" "30 lTu mo inn uu vijnu uHg
fjw am^ n m m '^t i\m ni? m ^wl tea lto^ llpi^
m mi Dm mu di liJu jnm n llw^ 1m iiq vi ?im m n^
; I'D 3'] Pim Lifii uu um l^
mi iwz I'D •fl'] Pim Lifii uu ui^n L^ um im lao uin m
rnnii w '^mmu u m
MIU filU
( 236 )
Exercise 118.
From Nai Tong Dee to Nai Sorn ( mutual friends) .
in^ m
^ t ifflri Lumiiu f^ulniuvif Fin gim
LLSsi mm m m miu mn imu im t m viJiu
i s: m m mu \¥\ Lv^jr ^(?i JTarn? uin rfi vliu fi lij^i
?
lli ?)ijnui fm m mu im '^z "siu t m \v\ fiwL^i im t
m 71U u fiv^L^n Fii^ -ii '^t la lo' m^ inu qli
laniFi 11 imm mm m m m mu
uiti i/ia^i ^
( 237 )
Exercise 119.
Master to Servant.
QU t si& iJJHi^u jpiulniuifif' Fin ms.
m Miu nau fsiii
mu w. m liJ m y\ mfilmuiw m 'm i g& i^
mm m u % '^A^ mil m m nj^ l™^ m mm'Q mm
1
L°zn ?5^ :jn m n m ?ij lan lq img m mj^suu fi^ 3U Lil Lvi
-till mu nu LVI liJ VI iiu Lf=i?jjj agta^ m ?i^ lu^ mu viu^ !au
tiJ m lu gti f liii '^ nm m m m \v\ uan nn m aivn?
Exercise 120.
For')nal Invitation to a dinner party.
mm m Ijo ^
wzui ( s ) y rai3J im w l3qj viiu Sfilpiq? lujifi
Lgm la Yi'jj s:; S nu fij iJjtvnu aivn? IiIjti i?iqij
( 238 )
Exercise 121.
Reply accepting the above invitation.
Qii t M ijjyifju fpiulniuTOFin eites
LTO m\i\ m m mu mim ( s ) vinij
m\ Tm^^ lli f\\ fiiFi 'qq^ tiiu m] v\m t m l^ojIiJ
■^Tjm t inu Tfi'iu ilu ¥mvk] % vinu urn ^ nrn tm
\mw\ u LL?iPi^ f^Qiu mm m m im wm
CpiLPiaf Lum
( 239 )
Exercise 122.
Reply, declining the above invitadon.
iHu w\u
TU I lani LUHILIU jIlulflluviJFin sitoS
Li^^ nm m m mtu] (^) vuiu
wm mw "mnm i\m fiwisi 'timj nau n^ qu ^ lad
T ■ ?
li
I mrc a^v^Lsi il^D
laniFi u LL?i7i^ nm uuoa ui m i/iiu mu
SRHriaf Lmifi
( 240 )
B. BUSINESS.
Exercise 123.
An answer to an application for a clerkship,
m mm llbu niiJu
™ \m im wm
ms 1^ III 'mmm m ou t sib itm u di s:; 21a in
m?lu W13 iLn Ht m ifu i^au ^ tc & um iTu 1^ vinu
LV^n: 11UU 141^ mn '^:; jji m ni? t mi^ lli lipi lIu
if\m mm do uivi im m mir nulu m^ lii mi t q^Tj
!jLi?im uinja fii si^ mnrh Sfi tnii lIu im mi di [siqIiJS
mm vm im mvrsf\ ^-3 sr lu uu maulli Pi'a 111 mu
\m vn^ fiSvi LLQufiiiJu
( 241 )
Exercise 124.
Invoice.
m limw LLQuniiJu ^uSi^iiPiin
gVl t ff.b LUklLU J.Fl. ffM
IW miU 3J1 IKl U1EJ (H) vinij
mil vnu Im m aiwi'^n ?i3 •aa^ m uu ui^iu -aQ^ vi ?i^
liJ L31 JJ1 m \m m nm mi si lu ?if=ii & invi en
u
II
jim siteis Li^i J']u ^m Lafs LiJu lTu tobo uivi vm n%^
% m m mvinj mu lTu jjqtj 3ji riu !j m 'mnm -aiiij u
u
3Q mu It! m \M 1m ffu u m "rnvwriU vr\ mu Tmvk\ st
( 242 )
Exercise 125.
Request for payment of an overdue account.
% yi f' imim ?.r. &m.
LL^^ mm un m v\m^ m) toiu
mu mu ^miiiu w^ n^i it mm vnuvifnii^iJiJ
^a mu 111 m i^ "hw lpiIq^ 1^ m "^ sin m fiv^L^i ^(^
LiJu Jim lTu 6ic^^^ 1J1V1 mu m%i\^ m m m mu m
yi vnu n m m i[^ tii ^nu '^t m m l^u Lin 'aiwH] •aiwLsi
fi miu Jli Is jjin ^ siLilu '^r m^ m^ ll^ ™ am^lT n
f\ fiiAiL^i Miij 1-^ g'l i/i'iu Pi^ '^r 111 Lfu fiiAii^i ma -^^i lliljj
m^ llIu pmu ffu li^ \h fii miu diuin 'ra &m mu
flFiLraf rau^
tj #1 nij Mi^ Ijuumj
11
( 243 )
Exercise 126.
Receipt.
u
mi "] LiJu wu sidb.?' 1J1V1 0^ mu ml^i jii m
w
LLPl QU VI siGl L^QU LllUIDU ?. PI. Gilai<S
m \m mm mm !j fii
u
Exercise 127.
To a shipping firm,.
vm wim mi t &o
\[^i mm m m u 'm nu m Tui^af iim riiiJu
mi] '^mmul.vi T\invii toiu m^lu 'mt<^ imim i. fi.
GiifflS imx mmu i\ mii Ifi lli mm a^nijH mj wn ^ei im
^ la iTu S^lll n'au OU ^ ei^S LJJHI^U ?. F1. 6ila)(S 30 TlIU
l^liJjpi mii\v\ Tim^i win mu ^im^inz^mianm unn
laniFi u u?i7i^ Pigiu fjutia jjt Ijn] t/iiu H^tJ
uiu nil vi^^^
( 244 )
Exercise 128.
From a firm to a Prince.
tj %i nu m un^nan mn njiu m m m mzi^i \im
mimtiliz^mii^n rn'mrr^ m mmm, iiJii i"im lyiiI?
mj ViTiJiU LfiffiiLL^']™ ih mnmf iim Gicndtei uivi ra
mmm ^.n^m&mo uivi m m wruiTi s:; m^ mt ]\jz?m
mrv^iiniL'li '=^t1.^^^1iJuQnniviu?i en L^ausnji™ ranviwn
TOJ 3 raj am llpi stliJji^ mmi
SplLraf (CJ)
( 246 )
c. oe:ficial.
Exercise 129.
sinl.
•iu ^ cn wr]wm™ ikHrmmm m^
wrm cs) LW mm m m Yiitm ci) Mm m
It
r li
ilmi ^ im^ \i mi n^ Mu JJ1 in w lu l^q^ jtquj ll£^:;
T II 11
Iw u uenliJ LM fiving^ LYipn^uiR urn uu 1^ ui miu
mnij Yin wklsi uq^ misan LfiuiiJ^ n?:;vijQ^ i?in<i iJj:lvifi
w 1^ ui PI113J ram m wj^lsi uq^ tJiLsan L?iuiLi7i
II
nrvi?']^ 3Jvni?ilviEJ vunu c!li wjnjnvi
5>
II
( 246 )
Exercise 130.
nitfim nmm
gii t cno LUHi^u f^iulnluvifFin sim
LL^^ mm 111 m v\m^ m) lsi muln ma ja[j#i?siii
mu t u nan iii gn gu ^ m v^qym™ j. fi. gim '^r
i ifs iu m t^i v\m i^ im "nm i v\w wm wz m lii lH
Lwjx 'QiTu fmim mtvk] m^ misan lsuiii^ j\rj\m
nmlvijj w ni ^^ T\ fn tra di uu im m m n Ivi viiu
m-^ [^ i^ aa^ im m\ m^ t j\m m\ ym^ m I3J % nj
u
wj:;tJi (vl)
li
( 247 )
Exercise 131.
m LjEju noQu muim
30 iJonu mill imuim \.%i hmmm niu Rnmfmj
mi m riHulj^ mM ulli S ra ^lau ]\n'k]mm trim
II II
II
Pijg-^ LLSQ^ m mn H^n mi t Ji*am?
milt 'iiiTu Lfi^T EJjj Lviu dn pi^j '^^ li ra iw ^nviiijl?^
II
LJtiu u an Piu viU'j ra am mm
II
(248 )
Exercise 1(32.
njiu vi£^ w?:;l^i um uiimi imim mtmi^ u?umt\
V1J11J c!li mtmm
1 51 Lmu u QT % WQn viu^ 0!J Y\ mm tan f ^ fi lli vi'i
u
LLu^fi iJi^Qu Ivi 3im:;vivi5Lsn -su iTu lli vi?nij inhn nm
fiij m mti'iM iJj:;jJim Ira lfiu 111 siijlln m % eai, %
(U), ra viui wi ?)a^ fiu imt wi wniJruim m m
fiviJtviTiiL^n 1^ Ivi m PiJtLgu lii ?i^ Fiin iwa Ifi ^squ pib
liJ UK '^u (U) uu ?j^ 'su Ljj l?i aTOtmiL'si u^ m m
wngu uf^s na^ m^ lluu ltoq vn ra m
raj 5 raj LLog llpi '^^liJ?^ in^m
SfILPIBJ (S)
Ej wpfu m?
II
(249)
Exercise 133.
dvi ^ to wqyfnpiu jpiulniuvifpin s\m
LL^^ mnu m iw mmm (^i ]\m wi\ nnj inu nit
y\m imm
^ IL^ I
iPiaf (Q) L^i n?3J 1^ mu uu m quoj'ipi QanliJmn eimp!
llnVIFI EjIjiI P1^ LLPl QU ^ 51 L^0U U
t
mivim L^i n?3J uviu 2fili?i!i? (Q) -^u rah ^: nnu un ?ii Jis
■fiu LLfi:;mj^nulu u'l f uulviviiui^ im lii tm wn
u
( 250 )
Exercise 134.
m\i 11 mj m ]k,\.m
gu f sitf^ Ljjuitju jpiulnauvif RH (m&
Lw mm m m mi% (S) ajjf^iravii?! i\mm
m mi i^iju m^ •] iAil li^Jii Quajim ^in nj:;vij']^ li?i
nj:;vijg^ viu^
mre -tjuu w\v\ mulfi if?iLf^ (H) 1m aanliJ '^m
njii Mm^ (VI)
imim
(251 )
Exercise 135.
mis. LJjyn!ju jpiulniui/iJFin sites
II II
ra?j m?\ Y\ jjoiififi uu LiJu Fiin ^ 111 firi^ un uiu ict
if^ u -^1 n EJ fiij mj ^ iJ ^ivifij l^u 111 m \m %^ n n:;Lvii"
ii^ ?i!j mu^IIiIm Jim m t m liIu ifu siteso uim fiwi^i
3a Qunji/i iw llujj lto s"1^ ^ m ini
51!] 1^ un fflijj njnu T/ifi iNnsic^n ljisq^i L?iuiii^
U 11
?
II
( 252 )
HARDER PASSAGES FROM SIAMESE AUTHORS
FOR TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH,
( With Notes.)
N. B. Words enclosed in single quotations ' '
with reference numbers are translated or explained
in the corresponding footnotes.
Exercise 136.
lu LUB^ mmm jj nuu mm im vm "^ i iilu mu
Ivinj iJjnjnm mi uilpi in i liIu wu im rm vnn im a
raif=i^ mwii ?ti in im fu tiuu w aa^ hi 'm lu' l sw
s imm Lilu vn^ piu Lfiu \.ih i\ win anira ' mu 7\ im
II ?
m pnu aa^ T\i fiuu w Lfn Lvi^n a^ iJituntu wi Fian ' iln
vih^ ffu' 3 iJj-3jim iu gi LLPi ' iln i^a^mi liIu iu lIj^t ' 4
li ih Lilu H uii iJjii!j LSI If) \m Lira piijj IvJ lu m']
El
noisi ^u li/»l y\ piijj &3nr]a L?tjn ^'n 'uf^ipi' 5 i.iJu ^la^ iljr
mi^\ii e\m 1^ iJi iiii ll£^ 1^ imm ^:if\m mrum liJu
( 253 )
L151 mm lu 111 LQi m IvJ s(?i f\ iIoiej mm n m m^ ^
T
LJJB St Ivi ^u n m m^ im aui i^ m l^u li^ Lw n m
m \yi um uu mnm 1^ m liJ vin inu vin ljiju ifau
vrd-M ^ lu lSq^ rau LLP! ^n m uu na mtj aum {m mu
S^ in^ vii LiJu ?njj fu in^ ^ fu in^ vii fu in^ m m m
LLPi TOFii m iLuu =] uiu viui m ill LiJu ?iQ^ uu mf^n
Qfj "au uan unu IIj Qfj fu lu img t mu an fu viu^ iiJu
II II
imi Lii^ LiJu m in>3 tJi dw hi lu ijpi nj't^ii^ fiitj m
111 111 iJ Laa LfiLJ vin mu m tlau t tJi uu^ u i,i?ii m mu
imn mvinilfilvllvi au iifi'] fi iJda^ mm m\]\ su viu
vir^^im m mu 3U m lu ivi au a^ lu Ljau Piu i/i lu lua^
n
mumu iTu Pi'a m t m jj-iH ^^ sr S uau aLi mtj rifiu
II
iim Hi '^1^ f=iu in ifau n lia^ im m uin vii fi m ?\m
■mu m aijj ja^j ii LOT lii wa "it ini iraul^ lia^ L'Qifjau
ad mriti m Lwm d m aiu all "3^ ln qi liJu piu su iji4
Yi mi LiJu nn 'sn^ vii m? aa^ ui^j nu am mu ati lu ifau
II u
sm uiu ra '^ aan vn fiu m^ vnn lii 1^ i^^ii lai aai
( 254 )
fiiim am m m uatj m mi sr lqi m 1^ n mm mu
^fi m di^ f\m m nuu lu m itm iiJu vnj fiu "niu mm^
i\m mm m imm Lira mm man ltoq^ viq^ imm
i]m am mm mm mm mtium mm 1!j ll^^ aw th
mm Qu «] n uin mii miu mi^ m '^ piijj m u w sr
iJjinui a^ 1[^ n L^tJi man i?i fa Ipi mil il^tmP]
1. is raised. '2. on duty. .'>. ilistiiiit from each uther at intervals
111'. 4. 'on each side alrei-iiately ' lit. set unevenly like the teeth of a
tish. .=). fEnylish) tfis.
Exercise 137.
u
JJ1 fij Km an^ mil aan lu Ltii tTi ivijjI li ljq m\i miu
fm m LiJu LJQ 'lij ' Pin LTO '2 vjQj ^ UQU ^ i!w m^ih
' 1si?i ujrs^ ' 3 f=iafj fii ^^ f=iu ' lu Hq^ L^m idu ' 4 lu
Ri ui ' i?nu aiJiLj ' 5 cjiti uu un n w jei tritju ra m ^
i^LiQ lii'^ H viu^ m ?\m Pi m mn fii si^ piu IlI m piiu
( 255 )
tiuu ?fi Lvirn tTu ^i m ']m ti'^i wz'^n ' 6 {n^ lu u
111 ™ ill fiQ^ Ru uu vi^^m n i!wlpi an vim^ piu m m
ajji^ tTu Jim fin tJ^lii'Daulslilra f=iu uin untj
11 u •
m m iLRFi an -am vim m m\i ^nvinjl^ vn^lnn
liJlli?it^api vin 'vntSa^' 7 ^gfjlu mx lfijih uMu
f II
m^ jciItaI uu Yin Ifg^ ivi^n iiJu viij pi?^ fn m nL2n n t'snr
II
du aljj^ ei£^Q^ liJ '^u li^ luu ^ Lilu Luu m'] f\m
m m Lilu vn^ ?iij mmm fn ^^ ll3j ^i vifa fie^q^ n n'a
?iv^iu iut^T Tiu m Lilu t n'jj n nu lu Ivi ?iau L^iua iim
m LiJu ?iaj vii^ ui^ ivn-3irmm^nu vn^jEiliJyn^
viu^ vno ?fi 3J1 vii^ viw 111 1m m vn^ Ijqli nm s'Ipiu nu
^ LJLjn dn Jci 1t/I uu I'll '^z liJu ra li/^ vin m vn S l?i liJu
3'filvl ail ?f] Lra LLPi jEi viu^im'] c^nn ?ei auliJlpi to Siu
( 256 )
iiiJ?i jn ^ L^u lliluc K m au luo ra m^ m ls?i jqej
lau LiJu riiviu^ Jii Lvifii uu li 'w imn inEji pis'] nu
llJ ' 8 L[pi -^^ LiJu ^ aUl^l 'DUl^l ^ V\m UU JE1 mJ MU^ ffu
LiJu pn;j viQj «] viu^ m \¥i a nu ?tj finu wa^ §ij aa^ piu
mw mu vJn luit lui:; mnu m mu itwr ifi^ ui^ 1\ m
mi] #infni^ m v\w vJan am^ ^ oii3j tJi l?i njt'^n Si?i li?i
111 1m nu L^n m fi-3 lu fi jJ^ Livij aivinj iKi {.im Jci ^
aaj n i\i iiJu pnu msj imm m llpi mq^ mu^ wl^vinpiu
Lu m nu MQi jfi au mi u au llti viai mui m uj m
m ^mm ' iJu ]\: mz ffu ' 9 liJ tm a h^ lu n lu'
u Lin:; viuau iif^ lu ^ aaii?! ^?i ^iu an m 1\ i aivinj iiii
m Wi Lia am u un Lin o^ liJu ^u
T
V,.to.
1. North west. 2. arniiiiifil, fitted up witli. .J. niaLjnificently
ilpoorated. 4. to go up and down fov pli'asure. .">. in comfort.
(i. glass windows. 7. important towns. S, iron i^juplings. 9. sit-
ting closely together.
(257)
Exercise 138.
\\i "^mz m\i m m m '^t w m m m m m m
% m\^ i m fjj m^ n ^ mt m m ?fi '^ ^ g'n cjliri
U U U 11
iJ ^ d ^ < aJ U A <U U 'A \ cd cj iJ
in^ t jfiliAlliJ ^ LfiT uiQ vin Fian tin vii^ fm iJruitu maj
iu gi Lii "km m\k\ vm li/J vli dnsj ^t^ai^ liJ i/in vn
II
niMi mv\v^ lijn di ' irapunn^ ' i ^ivilii nan ' iw\ mi
m "mi %Pm^ 2 \ \w ji^ ljq m ?m mi m \ m
•30 l^ "30 viu^ m tvi m 1/1 fly LJjfl^ liiu 1 iim m tai^
Iflu -^^i uflfi Piflu lii 111 1^^ i?Q mSflu m Iw mi^ m im
lu ^IfiH LLPi m s:; uan lqtIjjI^ Ifa^ iian rain im ^
mm QLi ^ iMi ^g[^ Ij fnui uu n i/ii i?iiy 'mm^ 4 ^ i.piti
U II
m m m m m Imi t rau jji ilrnijlpi n Ifa^ uflnun
11
H mm m luu LviSflu fm fi^ luii i?iqij jji ll^q u mm
( 258 )
fi^ u S'l UQTi LLfi m 1m lw^ mj ^ ii0n fm 111 m m iTu
piu ^ LiJu m ui^ im L?i?^ m iu iJj:;lvifi uii uij m
ms ■^mi It' Iu iTu mi \\ ltot S^ lhu mu ?iijn^ ui^ ^
n 3 in liJ m un ' (?iiu fm^ ui ' ^ in^ ^gn f liJu !j ^
II
i mn su 111 m iim n lai liJ n^u ri miin
Xnlrs.
1. (Krio'lish) ttle,L:i;ii)li uiics. '/. news (if any kiml. :>. K(>v:it
(:i town alxmt 194 km. by rail X. E. of Hanukok). 4. coilt. ■'. to
oil out sli(iotiiin'. (i, Hcvoss the tiL4fls. 7. frieuils and relations.
Exercise 139.
t rlvimulpilvitt)' ^[^ ^ijjIlI mu i^m m Lira m<3 •]
mu adn^ ^ upi im mi^ 7\ mi^ m u mm liJ vij^id vra^
( 259 )
Piju tM via^ Ivinj an m^ vm 21^ v\m g^ ' fiPig^ ' 1 s>3 m
nrm^ viu^ ad ^ '\\rj\ m mm iT\ 111 vn m m
T II 11
mi \m F1Q1JJ ivi njOTu sq 111 s^^ uu vin h m iJjtnnj
eIiu njOTtJ Lm uu ^u m i )\rjf\ \m liJ lviu m^
11 11
?
r u u
m\ mi m n "m liIu L-31 i^^au ^nrati gi-3 i<i aa^ nil
Ltfi n [?w aii liJu mm im \i <kmn\ m m m^ lHjq^
ullfif^i im S ™SiiJ Lm LmliAl n m ra'u ad l^iiih inn
LQm m Vivify '^:;lirlu nii Fifj n iJjv'^i l^liJ ui ad
m lu tarn:; vstmi m\ m m t iIj^pi m m m m
11 u
nu nm m? tm in iwn:; liJu ^ vrnw Lm' Is lu Lut^i m
pifg mj mm mmn nu rafj lIq^ nrmii -s: ^u '^i'^ i/h
m uu fi f=iu I'lfpiu v\m m un ^u mulj m m mi
r
mu'D ' ^ Ivfufw \m\m m rau uan m^ uu am n t^i
( 260 )
T\m liJ m m i^ 'ii riii r]7Z7\iu ii i"^ \^ m m I'a
"1 Ljj
UQfi LJJQ i?i:;n vijq
sliLi r\rJm \m uu fu qi W\ m i\m m m '^^ t\
\.T\ 'T. m Lsn i/n ?5^ u '^:; vn l(?i vi?q jj m m m m am
^^ 'H% lIq ' m!n^ ' 4 gn l4i iilu lAi'a m '^miu^m mnvi
t
vn JJ EJ m EJ viu^ Lu LUQ^ u ? -^m/n Ljj lqu u lli?i m
m umm ' 5 nrm^ uu fii m 'in ![iij mu'D u liJu nm
^itj n Iji' ^^iiJu 1? !a^wL'=n '^t w fii ini ira m^ ^ u
m^ nil m l(?i s: iJj^ iJj:;?iJJ n -^^ L°a^ jji -#1 ll'^^ lqi pujiI-^
T\7zmu im mi f\ it\ liJ iJ?^ iJr^iJj piijj Is i^ m
LTilslmLfiQm^nils 'Vim m ' 6 pi-fu LLtfg 4 mi
11QU lIu jjt m d-3 IvT Lin yja m f u i?i lmu liIu ^ fi jfi
11
^ inn nQT ti m !Q^ ra li^"" m^ i^n jjt lli?i' n'au n mi
1. (Knglish) .stcwiinl, major-domo. 2, orrtered. 3, a kind i)f
.soup, bisque ? 4. irliahk' information, ."i. myself, (i. cjuicl?ly.
(261 )
Exercise 140.
v\m Liri LMU m um v\m w mi Lrfi a ^^ w lqi
liJ m \iA um m t nm. m mi^ m m ' 5 IpT j" in
m v\m mi] ' i lot uu lil ii v\^^ im f=iu u ' S f]Ti|
- 1 T
LLfi u li^ Im" LiJu 111 QLi'i^ 1^ n l^"" m m im ui Lilian lIq
f PIU Id L^LI V!UI?1 VlSlJ IQI Vlli^ VimiU 111 LLPl'^ PTglw^LLT/lU
Ja m m vij^ im i^i m \m iim m "urn mf\ t ram
Lvi^au nJOTLi TOil^^ iiii nil ^ i^i Pifg "aa^ vij^ im uu S
mm im \'H ' m^ m mm' 3 nt^ ^ jil h^ mu m n ndii
n^^i^ 111 s1^ LViuau ^ tfu ti FiQijj im 1-^ am^ f ?i(^ si:;
w aan g'l m^i n iaii?! Cli^'^iilu ui?i m ltiI^ fimi ad lti'i
ihu vij^ LLfi LViu Lm uu ndii nf^itj iilu nrmiiliJ im
4^ iSHii lif Im'liJu iimmi ^ m im m m^ v\m liJu
mimi^ au m nau LLfi v\m llH liu n Lai Isi Id IvT ad
c7 I]
LiJu Fia ?iijn?j wl'^ T\miu m\ mi n Lrau imn v\m
( 262 )
im Dm jju^i
mimw Ru I'd" ^imjii ltot m ' un Rfuu ' 5 ^ij {|n via^
iriu JJ1 ?i'^ im' 1/^0 m Ivinj "am vij^ im mi im Tin
L^ug ^ nj^^mLi m] mi liJ m n V un ui l^ liq n" vi^^itj =]
un Lwn:; rai3J umi^i Pignii l^^j fii m u un an il viu<i
vi^^i Lm Lviu t mm wu n mau ^llviusI Iu an iiJu
cj [mm un fii^ lu inti? mn lu un m vittj^ un m m "^
n S I'Qr'UQtj Qu V1& n miu "] ™ un m^ lu ^ majran
lij ' 6 Tju \ji J] i^iJu mj yn ^ntj ra^ i^ian 1!j [?ian m^
•^z u ui m^ ■^^ m lu Lnw? n m mm f\m v\m wn mii
V1LI71 LYll UU
.\nlH.s
I. ilid not know that he was fast asleep. -2. power. 3. to wake
up in a fright. 4. still suited bini lit. did not deceive different
from what he liked, o. canary, li, stiginas (of flowers),
( 263 )
Exercise 141.
' m wi iu ' 1 gu f f' liwim mRrmmm &s\\>
fnojn 111 W'^^utui raijj aioji ljq^ u ffu lli m m i ll'^nI lu
FIT v^mu LLfi:; lii uti nrjviuitj fw di^l'^ji/iti EJntj -^imfj mi'^
iim SvilH fall TO3J rm iwnMi ' im sn^' 3 ^^ <^t
BiiPKi wii l^yi!i VII gi lSs to vi m wfHmm ?, pi,
eisib L^f^T L^i viiiau ji'Qg^H L^n lwbis LSI Lm ™ aiw
wi TO ?Q^ LTii fin 31 nulrij !agi ^ si im vd\m ii^nm
im iMQis LQ1 wa fn uuaiLi^i^ mj lqi jh^ m Piii tmu
fiLi agn qili^^ m t uii^i Liut^ vim^ llw
mi i?iu QiLTi^mjlw % LLfi ^ gn 'lSq li nzitu w
11
Fin ' 5 ii-jij ^f] 2i^n i-] ' gjHj njusjjfj ' 6 iJj-ffij ^i aina
11
2nu0 mj lSqIj^mq Pinm nnlg' iLrisim^ m m b mH^
f 11
PM LL(?1 QIEJ m IM 51S1 U
1
( 264 )
mt^ imn ?ra mmm ^ '^iifiLi m ifij'3^ mm llot n
111 ' rai3J ?iJj ' ''' mil m ly\ mi niu m ^ -^iLfi^ qt a m
u
LiJu 1/nu -^iLPiLi t mi mmim du ^if^inj m hiyi qi -^iLt^o
f ^ LiJu ' uii\ ilu ' 8 -^^ [?iij ^ mj n ^ Lm uni^ llejo n
llIu w in mii lii mmm fiiim ilitmi \^ ™ im "ii q
wii m^ ' mfjlu mmm ' 9 my n ^ %mf\m iiim\v\
<nmLi f ^ iiJu U1LI lTu fi pi^ijj Qi^ liJu ainji !iu lij 1^
m\m im snmtj Dili nizm m m mm wzn^n qiqji f^
mi tlm mm vii li^ ^n nm nwtml'wii mu{v\]lmu
m v\mh ii'sm im "^Mm v\m m liJ mij m rainyi u
T
1. .(iid;^eiueiit. 1'. Chief Justice. :i settUd. -i. rle])(ised.
."). In the yeai- of the liuisi- cif tlio fourth drr.ide. fciv i-vole).
(i. auieunieiit of servitude. 7. truth. S. creditor, inaster. '.». tlie
period duriiio- which, slavery wa.s h=o-al. in. approve.
( 265 )
Exercise 142.
l4i ^^ VII m isilvi mi vnnj lwx lit iiiu mm
mi^ mm fm lu m lolj f '^:; nK'3 m?^ Ij li^ uan "^in ' cj
f ^ Ilk vii ' 1 Lm LiJu ' !j mm mi lviuq m I'ln ' 2
Till ^mt^ ^^\ii m imz "^z Im mm ]hz[mu mm
]\zmP\ Tim m ^ mm vm miu m m '^z\v\ llIu f=iBi
LiJu iJ^^Iej^du im m l^i m lu fjisT^mj m mu ui ffu to
f
?
TOvimu v\\ii mj torjl i-au ffu ' im uiu ' 4 liJu i^u
LSI Pi']j s: f\z m L^LJ LJ1 y hiMi im wu m m 1'^ m
1 1^ TiJiii ii 11 mm m? ljq lli fi^ li/iw un S ilrwril m?
¥i m V. Ill L?a L?n '] aa irau g'l mi m im im lii lii
Figijj iJ?:iAiqi liJ ^ mm ww\u m l?i '^zm im mu im
( 266 )
Wf\ nij \m Lii'u mj raliJ im
u
0U ufiii ff^ P=)Q13J ?liJ LiJu ra uan ik\ mr\ vn mwr&i 1m
mi jm m ms mm i?ijj0 fiii ijj:;ltifi tmiJ^^ ^ lji s:;
111 LMli LIT ^:;l^l3J IFia^UQ^J villi 131 LL^l -^^ lH S FIQIU ^
3Jin 3U lii Fi'jj Lfitj t Ht m Is gi m m \m iTn f Ht
imm m vm \mx, m m m m m liJ anlpii'^ l^t ff^
il^^ Lilu fnm mi m \m m\ mm ufi mm mm h% mi
t?i m ?ijj m ™ 's:;l3j1.li mu l™ llpi ra iiJu vii^ imu t
' m wm ' 7 LJi s:;lli lmu lu ni^ lin
ij =
1. rule s. Kings. I. nilei-. goveviiouv. :!. for the honour ami
advantas;!' of the country 4. ^ambHiin. .'>. duty, position.
%. pui'posely. 7. |)08t(rity.
( 267 )
Exercise. 143.
' \m\ vmu ' 1 t m^ sjt m mr\ m n liJu 'mm
r\m wrs wm mu m? fs iJn nrm Lm L'^i m\m. t liJu
f=iu iJn PiJBsi n LiJii ' vm ifivn? ' '^ mm m 3^ina ^si
Tit]H vm mm 1m inn mj ' mi m mv. mi^ ^ t yivn?
mw^ \m mu ivm sin qul^^ jjt pi^ iIctt ffitn m? ad
111 m m\ ifliooo Fiu LiJu mr\x\^ m \m\ m m Ts t
\Mm n ra tii invii? piu Q^nqiilil fii I'mm lu autfe '^u
an II v\m t. % vm itm mr\v^ m. m n m Ivi m m
mim \m ^ v\m mi ^^IwliJ itm a^nqu ' liJ^liu ran
m 111 Liiu iTu ' 4 LLPi Tivn? ^ liJu ivm %mm la il iiJ^uu
m y\m 1?^ vivn? ^ liJu f=iu mvm iJm 1?^ Ivi m t m
uu \m vm mm waupi t m nu liJu 1?^ wcs utan au
tm L31 LI03J 1m ura fiJJEJT m m m] m % \^ wm uu
■ji t s?^ y ffQ liJ lu \mi wm LLW 1 011 unn u 1?^ Ivirij
^ n ^ UU LSI iJm aiQ vii su ' Lt^Q n^i ' 5 ^ u n y
1?^ yivn? U!an Suim ^ lu itm tamu vfa ^ im\ t\
( 268 )
mf]^^ m sin mn mmh mim m in Q!JifiHi mi
lu lamij im ^Irifi rati pi:; d m
1. Aden. 2. officer. ;i. civil scvN.ints. 4. velievc each otlici-.
.'>. of inferior construction, li. crater.
Exercise 144.
u
lu^lJ ' lllu nim frl ■^U Qi?l l^UU 111 ' 1 l^U LfLIQ LLJ^ L'Dl! U
m y s:; 1^ fiqi^ mm -^n s:; ra-3 j '^n 1^ m lii let mm
LWLij liJ 1^ llIu f\im m mii lu m^ i^'iim iw m t
mm imi m m itidu m m w qu m m m m k "lu v
\n ' 2 Lia m miu t ^t lli lu m^ imi v\m vm
mm mium t '^t urn fi m ifm m liJ m m lSij lsi
Qim? m ra Bui^ u LiJu Qinu 1 1^ mm mm m mw
mm il^ rai3J tmlm ^bij ilu m l'qij nij lwlj? rti
un mi Lrau l^j ml? In in mm m aiu mm m • m?
wififijjjj ' 3 LiAi?jj m rre nRa ivim u liJu [?iu lSq a
( 269 )
ffliu mi Lilu fnm m mv. lu yn<i ^ wu t mi mv. t\
m Iq ^1 ^^ ini Lra Ivi iLfiu cmj img n ^t m^ 1 ^ni
'^z m^ im \v[ m m^ v\ mmi % "^t iJjiFisin ouraiu
mu an d am^ 111 tm FifTisi ^a mm Ja ^ '^:; m mm
)\izmh \v\ LL3JU ?ji di sr liJ 21^ Iviu -^^lli m mih ^^
'^t LiJu m ^ wn imt m m dn liJu t au mi 111 ra^
mj iinjnjT m mm 1 fi'^z yijiu ^t m m^ t liJ mj m
mw} nm \i t imt am m vi \m f ^ ^i "^z i\m mn liJ
li
Im ?i^gn ra^ mi mi-B i]lfw m iln im mutt
i?n au 7\ m]} 1 m in \u m mi f\'^z\)\f\ mi '^mu m m
u u
i?ia^ mi m m mi ^ '^z m mu '\v\ tfa am lil J^n (?njj
m ihi im:; fin vn^ mil mr] h t m a^i^ '^m liJ ™ ^
u
( 270 ) •
i^ m m mi \^ jgu jqjj iiJu 1'^ ranu ']t !j sr im \h lii
^t 111 '^z Lilu t i^ ^t ]\iz'c\ii m f\ sf3 imt im tea umiu
iim v\m m d Ira -^t liJu ' ui im ' 5 s Ira s:; • ra
™ ' 6 L^g Plan QT t lAiiajj iTigLj a^R 5 ifw u m\ n rai
I'D fiifi^ Qsn Lja 111 m
\nl,s.
1. a means of self lielp. -'. at tlir i-aid tallies lit. in the eivile
of tlie cards. :!. manual labniir. -1. .'> points nv )ieadinL;s. ■>■ to pilnt.
(1. to steel .
Exercise 145.
nu m mm sf^ u mt []\u mi ^iraj llc^: liIu nu
( 271 )
l!u mm sw m im mi m? ra^s ^ m im mt nu '^u
m fn m \.m fiic^ i^ '^z l(?i ?igu ej i^i m [im njjmiu
mm mlm m m m am dm '^i r\ N:; nn "m
vijjjTU '2 f=iu Tfli Lfu urn n m^ Lfi^ S ^u i^ijis % m
u
EJ1U viu^ s" t h vm LTi'i ffu 'mm' 3 f ^ dg^ afj an
11 ? u
mtj v\m wn IjJ irair lmpi t i]\mm am %^ iim im lii
u?ira h mm t llIu f=igijj sf>] Im f^u lmu 1^ mu m 3U
pn^^ Y\ yi'^iim m m^ \v\ Imii %im ?iiiiifi li^ Hbu n
[W]t im li^ n imiz im t ■^z m im Im llpiu m m^
mi ' vl«3 itm Isififj 'siLfi?j " 4 Im Infi ra Pigijj sl^ mu lsi
upi nnSj n m vn i/^q IjJ m m^ iu ^gu vn wtJiu iJotqu
lIq ^'qli Im im LMU f^iQiJj iw Lm:; €^ lu m m^ t '^t
M'^utm Pi^ uu 1 lit mx Ml mm -^f^ llw sjjsji^n lmu
tTi ?au raj fldlu ni Jqi^ tJi m luw mmn n iaiu p^ignu
II '
'€^ g'l ili itif] ma^ lu iiJu la uw t Sifi5r|vif ^ '^:; m
Tim vm lu 1^ mu mm im ^^ v\w im im m mi 3ji
( 272 )
fltj'i^ lu LJQ^ VII mm '€i m \m
y<ii<
1. couiitevfeit coin. 2. will be put in jail. 8. wei.uhts
4. lit. to hear tile voice of plaintiff and ilefendant i.e. tn hear botli
sides of the que.stion.
Exercise 146.
piu ffwm^ f ^ Ln[?i JJ1 lu Ian u uw ]}r\mi i^ li^i liJu
lvid| m^ Pii] dQ3J iJjinui mm m S lii vifa n b:!!? im
•^^ iiJu mm m Im uw m im -ii "^t iim m? a:l? n
m? ^ vit^i^ "] ^^ miu *] s{ji^ ?!ivinj man ffilfiPi la ?ij0^
(?nii 'QsiJ 1"^ iiJu Fiii mmi u^^i -^s nu n m^ mi inn '^ i^j
m 3J mm m nu lai Ira nu im -^u nu tai m ui ro?m
Tj'^ viu i mmu mm su iPira^ 1^ mm ffd^^ n Ifa^
mj liu uii m&ii nu im rau ^^ i^i 1m iJjinun Inf^
?mu°^ TOilgj i?ici!][^ su i/i3i!j iu m i!\m ^ '^^ 1^ ?!,mu ^m
( 273 )
im \m\ii tillm n mm ilnmn m u uw iJnEiui
m^ m m m m m m n m aunn t a^m IM ivifeu
Piu n m im liJu l^t "aao iln hm^ mz m<i iwu lii auin
^:; Ivi LiJu "sw u%u mt mn n m ?\t ?\ii v\vi imu um
c!li!j ulii S ue^: t 111 WQ raiu iIjto'ui n Ijj m^i^ ' Fmu
u f
iJjifiui akivi Pi^m^n Kmu ' l vn lajlUmsi u n i? Ill
vn^ Imi in^ m n vn mu fnm mm mui mium 1m
f\'m m^ m n viSii mi 'li'iu lai \.\.m 5^ lan "am lai aii
li?itj % ym mi m n la aui^ 'lu' *Dau sjjjj ' 2 fiiu
m mm m^ lqt aa^ Lai lu in^ Mj yii^ vn vijkij ?53ju>i
!flQ^ piu L51 mj EJau fi aEJ ' liJu aiun fa^u ' 3
\)'/es.
1. to attempt in many wn vs. 2. unjust. 3. too many.
( 274 )
Exercise 147.
LLpi iiS^ ' mil m^ [\m ' l jji mm mut ti itm v\m
\\ Ivinj' riTisi mg liIu m mn im t niLw ma tau t ijq3j
mu ?:;Lir niiw vim^ iuiiau =] viu^n w uu Ivinj mu ' im
lAifi Yiviij ' -2 iJjr-^i 0LJ iiJu t in inn am «a'n m #ij w
u u
li^Li ?)[^^n im LiJu t mFis ?sunu ?iin!J tm jim^j vi^^aitj
LiJii Qu jjnn "DT] L&^ mi i?m ili^ m m m ]\Km\^ m m
^iii m "] im ijfijjtu mu ni? m "siu t mi^ Imqj' mu
miu mun 'j^ f ^ivifii n?"Hra!j n t mim mil an mi
iT\ liJ d ?)"uiu vin|i L^tiT ?ipi ?iQiPi m rfij iiai^i ' S 1m ^u
tJiT m m ' :5 LLtf] t f] mm mu w mu m m^m^
ilfin Ijf (^flfi IjT 111 f fi i iJi'i'j n ^iw°ij T\7tmm ' i?)w
aan ' 4 inai^ mzimi im w^ mz mm iiJu t ^uinj v^ij:;
Itili im imi iim in min u iiJu u'l ret^nu uan m\ii
( 275 )
mm v\m wz i iwlvinj m m m m liIu i ivi^uu m^
m uii m m piijj imm m iuu du via ?isi luliJ LviSaii
u
mi w ^ ^f^ ^071 via ?i^ m liJu n?"l'=53J i^ ^Pi ^lu Lwavi
i]j"i?iij m im wt t ]U m wu m "am t npii liJu m
di nr'^n L^i n?:;'^n ?il =] ra'a m^ =] ^i^ nil fJiEJW m m
pnjj r^:; m^ yinim im mt mm i\lm m imiu n
mu 1m ctI Uff] Ivinj' "] fiii mi init t m ^qu cJiejiw n
umlil rac iuf^i mu iJ?:;i?iii ?imj ^ i?i'i^ =] via^ lu ra:; ^
m n LiJu vimi LiuQ m imw iri^ mvifii liJu ' m^ lii iLtan
piju rau mili^ ^^ '^z w m liJ ^u m im mi m n m ^m
m A\ m m n iim lil mu mi mu ^ ?sqii^ S wiun
>3iu LQT 'l'^l?i ' 7 Jiri di^ ad mm itm u lIuttJi Luawm
II II
iMW au'n^i SJJJJLUUJJ Lilu ^ Luii mm ■ntmi ilrai jim^j
noli mi wtmu mtmh u ^ wt au'ai v^r avif^ viunI
( 276 )
' ihfm i?igu '10 Fill viu^ i ^ fla im m^k^'op ilJu 'nm
$\ inn m m^ ipfa^ imu vn S 1^ iilftju C iH? sr IM
ti t wkIti^ Lm" LL^i^^ vn m m m m m m lim
mzfimi m lH lAi'a m uiu v\m m lpi™ i^'iu m ffd^^
m wa wj^lifiu llIiIsJ -^iliIu ra-3 LfiQ^ liJu mmi m
1. once upon -i tiu)e. 'J. soldiers. ,">. evenly. 4. to ao (of the
Kinu). 5. reception hull fur distiiioushed straiigei-s or guests. 6. to
transact the business of the Kingdom. 7. were diligent. s. ruler.
9. to reign. 10. food for the King.
Exercise 148.
\
imi LIU d. [m ono mf\ mtmii mim mzi^i m m
!1
111 ih mmx i^ ' di iJK^w^ni! i^rfiiii^isn^ ' i im^yi inn
Mmmi i 'm mmz m iiii -m mi m im 'm fii mm mz
( 277 )
rm i^inLuu t in m^ ma m^ t?im wznii mtuij ?\m f\i
Mifi t mn lij lu llj iJj^iffu m *] ri mm u'l m t mtmu
m ' ±izmz mtimm ' 2 m mu m if\m moi'q miuu
ife^ LLf=iu^ W0JJ ifigtj 'uiu ilini uanm muviu^ f^uuvnmn
1)^ LiJu ' yig in ' 3 l^i mmiu mm mi wmiPini?! piq?j
iCT w:;a'U'uii!:;n:; am v\mm miu iai3':;v(1? si 'tjifu '^w im t
yjoTQ mm i^iau gi w f=igijj wu 1'^ 1 1^ "wi m? ?ij jq^
m n W"invi ajjL^'^ vij:;Lsn qli Mg i/i?^ '^i^ siJ ltou u£i?i
nu I gi Lilu i/^rfmpini?i Lfsfs Lmg fi mot3 ta^Fi '^t
^ EJfi ' 6 JJ1 pijgs untj iJifn uanm n?iu impijj Yia w:;n?mi
II U f
m L3J ?i Li?ijj h 01^ LMPi m gn ' 7 Lu 3J Ifu im m '^u
u 1
( 278 ;
m^ mtmmi^ mtmi] ?iii\.m mzi^i m m Y\n mzT]'^
mm im q'i mi ^ m m iim am^ \m ' liJu nu mm'8
? 7
u
uu liJ m Yi?^ ju ig im m m 'm "sm mi^'] ii^ m m ill
St tiQiEj LiJu mm Mmmi m ^ dn liJu wj:;ffui?isi(?i mi
nmi ^u m m iim if\m iaicti^q ^iluu mil m f\ iljtffu
1. H'lie-re Buddha's tuotli in kept. 2. ,iU in readiness. :i. clnet
num. superintendant. 4. prayed for the well-l>eing of the Kino-.
;"i. Buddhist doctrines. 6. designatniT particle of pnhn leaf lioo);.^
7. said unwillinsly that. «. proud.
Exercise 149.
' t lAiJtujjj jTala^ni? mi mtmiii f\mmiv\ ' i \v\
11 ?
iJotIFI LLfi lAI?tlJ?3J'3^ttni!']^H ' LLO 31 T/lfl fl!]0W^ lAIKUIYl ' 2
!j Ividj I U0?j LLt^ jmrjj mmi i^ m w lu ata^^ -^ww
nj^ l™°i Jjvii mi u 3 Im i/ijiij im fm gi l^jj 1^ ra^ wir
1
n?nn IiJjpi man^^ Ivi t mi} iIotifi mijj D Im !j Ivioj #i
•Q^u L^n Lfiu fiij mu m^ "] im S Ivi mn mu m? mu "
( 279 )
m "1 w LiJu i\ m "am wm m m^ 111 m ^nm m m]lii
t mm LLs^ #1 L-^u asj-lu v\mu ]l7tm^ m m m\m mm
ill u?3J mi m 'tjiiij v\m nu iJj:;mFi iMu m gu mmu L^au
ill im m m m il '^q w pin ftutq siiacnb liJu il f oi
ifi u LM ^ piu i/^ifi m fiiu VII nu lu m? w'q ng^ tm
Lilu mm mu m Lau m? Mim \v\ m uiJnn sin w mijj
111 V1U1EJ iIotipi fw iffl ^ifu iTu m "^c nu S Ivi u li?i '€j
nulli QlJIvl Qltl JJ1 Q1LJ L9UIJ LiJu i?iu LM m '1^' mil
lu ' 4 W0 fig^ im m ma mm i] i\.um v\m im noj ^u
L31 i^ \.iK^ raiJJ ra w:;tJi 3jvii jjui^i? '^ i^ m \v\ m m
1 g am ui mm ' lu njiu mm m nnmm ' 5 i\n yijil
EJ1 mm m mtvm s^i in?^ mxmm t\ mi m to im\
m Lfiu ni? mM liJu ni? wa fiQ^ 1m iiiJfin -^Jin wj:;?Ta
unj Jpi vijji^ iJrniFi § liJu ni? '^tim S lli m?^ n^g mi
m aiQji m vii nuli^i^ ^lii "Dan s?j3J ' 6 '^ vin v^r
n?miliJji?i main Iw fi^ v^rai'D aioji to jji aiu lansj
( 280 )
piu fi" cno t am Ivi iJfij uu nil? m m vijwfj t im \¥\
?
toiR L^jj ifin ilttvra \.ih m^ mtvimi'hlm imm mm
? t
m gi ra UR M m m wiu 3J m u moj an squ iim inu
11 o
mi lAiuu ph^ '^
1. Edict of the 1st & 2nd Kings. 2. officials. 3. great city. 4. the
thiTe card trick. 5. said (to the King). 6. unfair.
Exercise 150.
ujUQwnuQ^H Lm 31 Tifi t^aa^ m mtmin u \m u mu lu
T tl f 11 O 11
^?ru?jj uvn ?i!Qg°^ im v^j:;jn!flg'^ ug? n nu mu jmg? vkiiI']>3
1m wnij m m q'i
lu 'v\i?"Lnyi ^'uim viTtvki mm^ l m^ w:;jtq mfw
II
LMU Qi mj m m^m nJu liu vn^ iim m mm ? fTdg^j
fi3jf^Q? ^ '^" ifiuiJi?^ 1m Lsfm ?^ ifa^ S^ lu liJ LWjnr piu lu
ft ^ ?
v\iu uiu mm ?\mu m u vi -^u Ipi LMttjiii ? viu^?ia n jj li?iu
inn VI ? v^Q mu m isfju L^ llpi m nn rauuu n jj mu jjin
11 11
( 281 )
'ymmm ll?^ ura mm. fi ttq m? im niiTp tolIqvI 111
Lfii L^u mm m^m^mlvi 7 1m K\.%m mu lluu im
li f
VK^Q^ LiJu Lira Lm Cm w^ wtijn mfw '^z Ivi (»ki \n mu
°lv\ t mm)] mz'sraiii m'i^ m n TO:;!njiJj lia si:; Iw uro
rail] !aQ^ 'Iw vli 31 urau' 3l^ tm ifiiulm min I3J
li!}^ J[j Nu m^ a"l? L^n Lm Ij'J l^u ^iviIij toijjjj q^
HHUQw f\\\m LfiKnnlvi 1^^ lu ll^q i\ nmimn mu
nvit^m LLVi^ viw LM '^v ra In l^u mviju Ti jnum? an
1
im m^ wrai'Q mm "nm wfum mim yntvk] m m
iA]lm Lfimn Ivi #1 m?l?<i [fuM ffdgo u n lwi^ Wvi
wovn rami LLfi \m ii 'Bi lleju^u LLfi t w"?tq fa^^I
'^z\v\ m mm\m k im m miu liIu Pim llfi ranu
LLfi LlJu raiJJ L-^foJ LLTl HU ini4 itm Ssl lulil
1. title of H. M. The King of Siam. 2. method ordered by tlie
King. 3. townsfolk.
( 282 )
APPENDIX A.
A classified list of over 800 common words,
liable to be confused owing to the differences of
the tones.
Words bracketed together are pronounced
alike, words on the same line have the same
fundamental sound, but different tones accord-
ing to the column in which they are placed.
Be careful to notice the name of the tone at the
top of each column.
§ 1.
I'diri'l St J /nil fs i/ilti.aJ.
Common
mu a net
Bl
uncle
Q1U saddle
Qiy shame
1q steam cough
Falling.
mu soft
01 to dress up
n\s a bo wl
Qiu to read
iibu bent
^ dock
Low.
mxi fat
QB-u babyish
m3
to gape
to refer to
Qiy low fellow
iiQi4 slender
9 to rustle
§ 2.
Common.
( 283 )
5j B initial.
uu on
I UTU to blossom
1 tn«^ to guard
u-\s thin
Falling.
' u^ to crush
uin path
uvi lesson,
chapter
m to grumble
fli shoulder
lu
leaf, sail
iui to slacken,
light
m marsh
itio pestle
TJiy afternoon
\ to chew
the cud
ui: slave
ifia surfeited
tix4 to cut
Low.
m mad
tjii4 house
trij some
dltj to smear
Itj dumb
itjT crucible
w surly
itjQ idiot
im slice
( 284 )
§ 3.
U'D
Ck.
initial.
Common.
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Rising.
dij
its
-h
nin
male
noise of
cymbals
workman
1^
elephant
1^
granary
my
mirror
to pierce
it is so
to use
fi
m
&
to seize
by force
cymbals
lame
to darn
goad
pungent
HI
tea
m
cries of
slow
joy
^
k
nun
noise of
frying
burning
wood
joyful
to point
out
wet
exchof
contempt
"fng
m-i
people
I'D!
to rent
1^1
morning ■
to be ru-
moured
( 285 )
•at!
upright
n%i
to rejoice
at
m
storey-
grade
±
h
4-i
agreeable
pleasing
bruised
careless
§ 4.
Common
proud
soy
sad
insipid
'SI
to talk
to ar-
range
Falling.
yielding
leader
sign of
future
k
to roast
Low.
to aim
tiny
2--
wages
SI
strong
manifest
Teh, Dj. Initial
Acute.
to tickle
yes
Rising.
•say
gloomy
-5)1
yes
much
( 286 )
§5.
Common.
mu
to play
mu
hard
mi}
alone
whoever
one only
m
earth
§ 6.
Common
straw
Falling.
JX
Low.
initial.
Rising.
mil
hasty I cut off
mu j rill
custom I stubborn
house I
my
' cotton
i thread
1 can
im^ j
height of a
platform
etc.
now
to roll about
initial.
Falling.
Low.
p. in
Acute.
ii
ell
m
(palm of
the hand
sole of
the foot)
1
dark
mi
millet
sky
Rising,
lid wall
Jij
sapan
wood
( 287 )
Common
Falling.
Low.
Accute.
Rising.
to send
3amboo
floor
sour
to beat
clothes
vIlD
my
my or ^^y
dm
hollow of
the hand
concern-
ing
Id
flax
to darn
Id
fire
to desire
2i
pustule
d
i^
to snore
to mutter
a boil
to listen
coast
nil
to bury
(1) to cut
(2) tooth
scabbard
pod
to twist
a rope
to hatch
to drear
t«lm
to sift
■jIIbj
to beat
against
foam
to float
to accuse
mm
fluted
carved
to be di-
vulged
fuang 8
atts
^ 7.
( 288 )
y\ H. initial.
V{\
Rising,
to look for
wny oyster
vQi to guard
jealously
^Q tower
^ Minj brave
/ ^ij to divide
n^ to boil
hasty
net
Mil
iiW
VC\i
mi
Mi;
Lm
vigorous
tail
louse
to yawn
a small jar
(1) to lose
(2) health
^ijj to carry (a
litter)
^-i hungry
■m
■m
vm.
w
M14
im
iiW
^13
TOl
Falling,
glague or
>.P. of jars
of water
to feel an-
xious for
bundle
goose
Ml
Low.
five
^Qy to suspend
ditch
wgj
^^ quickly
v\v,
castor oil
puppet
procession i im
place uw
separate mij
to bark
shares
angry
dry
shop
a plant \ j^j"].!^ to weep
1 1^ to give
M13J
not quite
ripe
M13J
to prevent
TO to carry (as
a bag)
( 289 )
§ 8.
Common.
nn artifice
^ to run
together
fiRQ^ drum
IfiK far
TITO stag
m:! glue
im to
scratch
SI I
^'^ Srdpers.
pronoun
my body
n
Falling.
^"iQ laws
^^ to press
fi^i to reap
ni at dawn
n?ioj match
box
fioti before
im old
^ cooing
ira bold
iiri (1) old
(2) sign
of dative
I A', ^ 6^. initial.
mil
to em-
brace
Low.
mi but-
tocks
n?faj tube
Injf near
nrij wide
ntiu mass
mi to step
ihi nine
g' to lend at
usury
iTO small
deer
iin' to mend
Rising.
mi cover-
ed
( 290 )
in spring
In hen
tn^ to cheat
tn.» bent
UM with, to
protect
nu haft
^li to separ-
ate
noiTiD. P. of
sermons
um troop
pile
noj basket
ifiyg to asso-
ciate
^m echo
i^^g to en-
tice
^ 9.
3 FlPl 'a
Kh.
III if la/.
Common
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Rising.
Flli
TiU
1114
person
viscid
to
look
feather,
after
fur
R3J
sharp
TO
to
op-
TI3J
bitter
press
TOJ
nig-w
to hurl
cross
wise
neck
TIB
chapter,
heading
please
to beg
(291 )
cangue
rough
\f\ {\m)
who
R13
musty
smell
salted
scythe
Til
a root
tny
stake net
I'll
egg
news
ni
knee
to ride
in J
m price
di to
kill
my
camp
fever
m (i) rice
(ii) to en-
ter
ordure
dregs
to flog
IRJJ
dark
colour
R1
trade
''"toil
to
down
1r
to pull
out
im
order
series
to che w
•tn
leg
to sell
L'il
to unlock
white
iTn(i) 3rd
pers,
pronoun
(ii) hill
(iii) horn
to write
needle
green
( 292 )
^"U Rti
m
%u
(l)toitch
(1) basin
(2)DP. of
vehicles
[
division
to-
squeeze
(2)tosing
^ :
«i
teacher moment
mm
Rsiaj
mm
canal I nimble
rhythm
Rl \ HI
^. 1
word, [ \ nightfall to sup- i
piece
port
ihi
tQ^i
1
gong
(l)things
(2) of
@ I i
1
ditch 1 J pair
curved i
§ 10. n
L. utitial
Common Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Rising.
a;j to
?i2J to go
1-
v\mt
deceive
too far
to grope
a title
SITU
iSv,
Msin
palm leaf
iron
(i) bald
ii million
nephew
niece
wiu vari-
2^iy ex-
small
wj^iy
gated
amination
many
shoulder
Laos
imi to
question
several
m
{l)tO say gimlet
good bye
2)donkey
pheasant
M?n
tube
bucket
to sleep
to wash
( 293 )
Ik
to drive
away
l^to
anoint
Cih to ex
V plain
(.spirits
to shun
|u
slippery
?)i to
retreat
to allure
to pass
through
careless
a shield
to caress
to feed
k
clean
m
delay
wheel
'XvMi to
, flow
^^^ infat-
uated
Msng
to plane
to point
"IM to
wobble
secret
mi
yard
to pare
stupid
dozen
back
( 294 )
^ 11.
JJ
M
initial
Common.
Falling.
Low,
Acute.
Rising
wa
M3JQ
Mua
to bellow
all
pot
ant
doctor
JJDJ
?^iiQJ
WIIQJ
to stare
gong
dirty
uonj
wliau
MUQU
Peguan
mulberry
pillow
q n
in
■^Aiy\
i~i 1
to come
betel nut
inn
much
horse
dog
v^
JJ/
jTj mos-
to thatch
to regard
quito net
3Jiy
wiiiy
Mint)
plenty
widow
mark
ii^) \u
ImIi 3
li^ not
llj
1.MW
why
new 1
collection
Iwjj- burn
timber
silk
pig
3J
fi
wij
to have
uproar
a bear
( 295 )
(l)it
(2)potatoe
(3) fat
i3J1
drunken
§ 12.
Common.
field
to flow
to sleep
viiM
tiu
diligent
firm
mu to
3jn ad-
ferment
dicted to
iTiii!n
ijTn
crushed
ugly
rice
V13JB1U
WQU to
to kneel
hand over
barren
to con-
tract for
work
N. initial.
Falling.
mi
custard
apple
beard
Low.
m in-
front
■ vnii
face aunt
here
M'u debt this
massage
um calf iTsj
of the leg younger
k
meat
Acute.
Rising.
wui
thick
m
to run
away
pus
Vtunu
worm
north
remains
intricate
spinning
wheel
Mr.
w
to lead
TOvn
belly
( 296 )
rotten
to caress to sit
a child
ViUU
heavy
disgusted
to retain
to dissolve
un
very
water
mm
faded
leather
where ?
satisfied
i^ 12.
Common.
m
bent
work
hand-
some
t^ sloping
Low.
m
m
angry
fork
easy
foolish
Acute.
to con-
ciliate
sticky
Ng. initial.
Rising.
v\n^ to re-
cline
m lustre
3^ to gather
rai; crooked jaw stag-
gering
( 297 )
stupid
tree
trunk
hastily
ili angry
^^ spear
mT\ sad
bent
forwards
wnu crest
§ 13.
Common.
m
clump
troop
m bene-
diction
m
to escort
2 atts
nil)
to row
v^un
p. initial.
Falling.
wn to
jump out
beyond
measure
to split
Id
bamboo
to spit out beyond
Low.
nu
cloth
cards
Acute,
pocket
■nu
Rising.
dust
fruit
rock
will
to turn
( 298 )
fat
raft
wo
enough
elder
iw^
im^
peppery
diamond
nli
flat
to yield
lUl
mi
family
to race
m
1^
father
to speak
angrily
m
mii
wrong
poison
1 ghost
2 corpse
1U1
to burn
§ 14.
Common
tlti to mix
diu: to run
after
J-i to throw
iJtu equal
]} f^ F. J, B. initial.
A
year
crab
iiJi to pump
Falling.
dn to make
small
iJi jungle
iliv. string
oboe
grand
father
lui to blow
Low.
Ml sour
tJi aunt
ti™ obtuse
tj Chinese
poll tax
i^n target
Rising.
half closed
( 299 )
§
15.
J
R. Initial
Common.
Low.
1;
Acute
'?) to sprinkle
R taste
ti carriage
J3J
to smoke
(of a fire)
jjj
umbrella,
shade
a-
to tremble
h
to be leaky
5^
fence hedge
ny
at intervals
m
•
music
fiy
fierce
I
hole
i
dull
9^
know
h
to dance
51
continually
w
nest
5l
topulltight
n
mouldy
1
n
to ramble
h
rotten fish
in
we
h
eagerly
JQy
trace
ran
blunt
foy
hundred
nw
to rush in
5114
eager
hu
shop
J1J
confused
51J
shape
h
to desert
1
something
acre, field
Ir
poor
iiW
strength
iW
a sieve
im
vulture
JQ14
to cut off
5011
to whet
JQIJ
hot
ilo
(1) to place
under
(2) deputy
untidy
boat
JEW
A
15B
ditch
dawn
fading
5BJ
to cry to sing
(i) rain bow
(ii) length
slow, long
^ 16.
Common.
TI3J
dim
V15J to do
Royal
prefix
Tt^u stag-
gering
envelope
to spread
sand
a trap
( 300 )
fl Fi y "D (TO)
Falling.
to send •
a part
Low,
( «jj vine
] , gar
TI3J
orange
Tiaj
hid.
illuminate ing place
«\nu coarse
cloth
to move
to & fro
to put
Acute.
"Tim
tumult
TO
obstinte
iny
initial.
Rising.
to add to
m to
take up
garden
two
r mu to
plait
R1K law
court
?sn5 es-
sence
bowels
left hand
certainly
my
(1) string
(2) late
r \ to
push
1?? pure
clean
r. 301 )
to wash
m
torpid
sign of im-
perative
to sign
four
ma
mat
for the
purpose of
to shake
seducer
m^ sad
mif
m a perch to jest
stick i
■If
rib
ma
clothes
JTti mmce
Hui; word
a set
short
T'a trust
worthy
nerve
to buy
k
Tta
Yijtj to
wipe
wealth
girl
Saturn
i^^ a post
colour
me
tiger
^u pre-
ferable
( 302 ).
1111)
to pene- 3
trate /
J
my;
pale
m
,d
to
transform
evil
smell
mu
to know
^f^ bushel
jfji^^animal
true
to peck
violin
11B3J
to prop up
to slander
thinness
ononeside
k
end
marrow
lIBiJ
fork
ihu
squinting jto hide
"1 iRfiJ
ripei
-^ Venus
happy
f^to fling
against
to de-
nounce
•TIEIJJ to
exercise
to super-
impose
7^(1) to
hide
(2) to
whisper
(3)
naughty
pain
M debt
Hii sacred
precepts
white
to teach
( 303 )
§ 17. fl 'Yl S BJ n ^ T.
initial.
Common.
Falling,
beans
Low.
all, over
Acute.
Rising.
-
viQ aque-
duct
m to
weave
VIBJ
'Old
punt pole
' mi to
wade
- timto
deliber-
■m
to dread
stomach
to elbow
ate
Tiay
my
tiou
nou
to throw
out
vn
to paint
perverse
i
mutual
m if
y|^(i)wharf
(ii) ap-
pearence
^-, to
provoke
to retire
tn to
sharpen
road
v,M to
seperate
tllJ to
clear the
ground
t
[ -vnualms
\ TO rivu-
( let
guess
im,
coal
to purge
you
trill
long purse
astern
tnii
basis
( 304 ;
to prick
Siamese
ivn
to kneel
HHJJ
justice
T^°-i to do,
to make
yi
occasion
to redeem
trail
dense
flat
i
dull
ingot
iTii (Dashes
(ii) equal
old
lan
m
man
■m
1
V'
uneven bag
?
ito rub
1
iiw to
miscarry:
l\ to
plough
iVil
ifii
foot assort-
ment
cave
anvil
fi
(i) place
(iiJ which
mid-day
all
pail
iviyj to
dispute
( 305 )
§ 18.
J]
^T UJ.
lidlial.
Common.
Falling.
Low.
Rising.
m body
m dwarf
m ticket
uiB stake
i^g to add
before
m dimness
of sight
^m banana
leaf
ms must
f? pound-
ed rice
i.iM melon
m to wake
up
f to em-
bezzle
liw to ar-
^u shallow
simple
1 cup-
board
range
\ entrails
1^ to creep ] \y[ torch
\ 1|i under
iir)i oven
Ml tortoise
ilii cross
piece
mi dice
^i Inj scissors
^:1to mouldy
r: LTif pert
M birdlime
^"j arm
chair
m to es-
tablish
611 to pound
Ki low
^Q^ to strike
i^ty small
( 306 )
§ 19.
W. iiiilHil.
Common. \ Falling, i Low. \ Acute,
wah
to place valley
/ ^I'^whale
} ;ii4to em-
( ployhelp!
i
VM to :
decrpase \
1;
active
V\7\U
to sow
II
palace
catarrh
1 T\
|to say
j 31?
Ivacant
3111 in
get on !
31J
Ispacious
Rising,
ito swim
\m to
salute
3111
to cry out
in terror!
I^tokeep
3>1
temple
■sweet
rattan
lw3
to shake
M3J
to hope
( 307 )
§ 29.
!J QJ )'. initu
Common,
Falling.
Low.
Acute.
Risi
?JQW
MllQW
iIqw
?JEI3J
to consent
tapering
habitually
to dye
yi
QlJl
wnji grass
medicine
do not
auin
to want
"Jipaternal
grand
mother
difficult
yij india
BtJU
yij
rubber
sort
smoked
meat
uiy grand
iiiy
diu to
mother
in pieces
remove
h
spider's
web fibre
big
\is
mi
Sj
wnj^
to shoot
vain
more
girl
v^
^3
^.
mosquito
confused
barn
mn
i Un retite
to cut
yny giant
( 308 )
to respect
to watch
m
not yet
mu to
clean out
to explore
to slacken
to oppress to repeat
to strike
to get bold
yj per-
manent
dati to
oscillate
arrogant
is
yj
to defer
?JQU to
conceal
Notice.— The columns in this appendix marked
falling ' ' and ' ' low ' ' should have been marked
" deep " and "dropped" respectively also cf. Chap. V.
( 309 )
APPENDIX B.
A List of Common Words having two or
MORE Diverse Meanings.
n
m crow teapot
nstt-^w pavillion to rush upon
riiim village head man presents
mi together to prevent
jin: sheep to carve to scratch
ijh old ripe to ( dat )
lira glass beloved
i.mi to connect to reap
nil bold seed plot for rice
n?5Qjj bolt rhyme rafter
inx island to arrest to perch
nu frog plane full
fiatj to mix to draw up endowed
my footstool to run aground
ifijnt armour brittle
nsQtJ frame dried
nson alley lean to make to swallow
( 310)
HI leg, section Interjection calling at-
f LI to drive to repel to sing *-
I'D to open animal fat
Hu to sing (of birds) funny, to stretch,
ni to enter rice ■-
i-tii horn hill he she they
TiiR entirely to be broken
inn Nonmongolian Asiatic visitor
Af\ ball of cotton to be corrected
I dregs addicted to odd number
nm to torment eye tooth
mo elephant goad to ask for
irn feather fur to remove goods
niBj of {sign of possessive) goods
iiaFi to tie nearly empty to scrape
Ki leaf stalk to broil
^Q fetters joist
PI
Ri word mouthful
R14 to itch rod D.P. of carriages
R1?! to gird to conjecture
Htj to associate lantern
( 311 )
Mau
hammer to squint to look cross
ipy
small prawns accustomed to
i
to rub moment
?
ditch to call from afar
pi;li
to spur to plait
?n
prison to bend the knee
m night to give back
ii ivory teel seed
Ifj to bite to half -open
Hu to seize to roost to reflect light, to
-sin attap from f^"^*
ii to remember, obliged, to imprison
s~\u plate, to write with a stylus, diluted
SR to prepare strong
•^u poor until
nm to mark to agree '^m v^m proud
'^f\ to write down to reach to taste
''iin colic sheaf cork tuft of hair
-s^ to rub point to light
( 312 )
m
I to dine (of priests)
tea cramp
in
4-
■^1
slow rude
tllll
edge male
^U
steep rosin
m
basis intention
•b:
time wicked
11 LI
to steep to transform the shape
m^
rat great grand father
iHQ
ferment family
%n
to wash clothes to interrogate
^n
to denounce to fling against
KQiJ
fork to repair
iTta:
awkward ignorant
Fiiy
solitary to mow
^°i
black, to weave, to dine, to transplant
riu
side stubborn allotted task l^^^®
A
^
good gall
r 313 )
^tj unripe in good condition
^^ to flip to lever up to kick to
im: to split wood to repulse [^disentangle
^Q
blunt obstinate
l^Qtl
month worm
eye old man
gn
m
lap to draw water
m
to pound to prick
^B
to add to bargain
to take flight (birds) to sharpen
m
^^
cave box
nw
abundant to embank to enamel
pn
cheap to touch correct
m
to carry to observe to stand on
one's dignity
irai4
wild fraudulent illicit
vii
¥1
landing stage, to wait for, appearance
liny
Siamese free
i-Vll
ashes equal
ii
who {relative) place
VlQ^
to throw to fry
mv
to go against lance to strike
( 314 )
U
y^,^-^ front season
■un much expert
tii soft scaly ant eater
fe finger inch
lAum pus marsh
ilu raw cotton tender
ma meat deer
L
^-^ shoulder overflowing
lu leaf sail D. P. of round objects
tjiy to turn aside afternoon
u^v. to blossom folds of a door
uv village thin marsh
iLii light not heavy to go slowly to
make water
tnvi tical foot
ui^ to wound a period of 6 minutes
im fishhook fragment
m dysentery twisted lazy
■uxi on vow
uifi to powder to iron clothes cloudy
( 315 )
iJ
{Ifi to fix to embroider
3 Chinese poll tax pounded
itl^^ to shine to draw out
tJjiJ to fine to level
\J crab to spread a carpet
&jiy to turn widen
m to fry to paint one's face delay
iiejg to sweep brilliant
u ghost corpse
eJ3J I hair
to disobey, daring,palmof thehand
sole of the foot
eJi
di wall lid
ti-\y on the part of addicted to
im to watch,to go to an audience of the
King or Princes
^ boil skill
pj^ rain to rub
to become worse very bitter
Mnu
(316 )
Vi
iWX
to plant
stomach
mv
to disunite dazzling
mn:
because
melodious
mv
carpet
to sprinkle
ms
garland
chain indigestion
!«liy
liberal
handful
wn
pumpkin
to hatch eggs
tooth
to stab
vJi?
straw-
dark
ijjj
abundant
to take care of
4^
3J1
horse
3J
stool
llj
timber
vowel, accent
Imw
silk a
I fine sign of a question
Cu
oily polished he, she it, potatoe
IIW^
flea
first
U3JU
although
similar
Mjjg^
to cure
section
c 1
in
medicine
LI
tobacco to cover with
tin
to retire
to make a sign fP^^^^
( 317 )
to fear to cut in pieces
to oppress to strike
to crack open plentifully
^^^ evening cool
a large net to praise
to make short, wrinkles
to cast (metals) to diminish (of a
X ^ • [swellmg)
smoked meat, to jump •-
to stop mouldy
season menstruation
root to vomit
to love armpits
indistinct railway line
body rough copy
near to edge
j-Vi to extract sect.
jfey hundred to string
tjy to wither to scatter
m untidy after-birth
5Qti to hover to whet to winnow
5^^ ear of corn to dig
jj dawn glittering
1
m
Iti
(318 )
t\
^^ donkey to say good bye
^^ to hunt sky to retreat
^^ secret to sharpen
to drive away to examine
bed of a river D. P. of boats, logs,&c.
interpreter to fasten with a rope
spring threshing-floor active
bald a milHon
rii to wash to execute criminals
m to grow large short cut (road)
uf^t and to flay beams to support
n^ and to look [columns
Mu to sail to run (of a vehicle)
Mi wheel to provoke
^u hasty to expose to the fire
lin to cease to lift up
mii royal Luang (a title)
f] to draw up with the hand, category
f^ to measure temple
WW to have a cold to write a running
iix to stop aslant [hand
mI comb bunch of bananas
(319)
lifi war to search (for knowledge)
nK
pond to wash vowel
n^\i
late rope
^n
teak to tattoo to dig- cf . Chap. 25
[§14 page 130
?jn^
to repress,final consonant.to enchant
2T^n
sculpture bolt
m^
pirate to shake off
nfh
a set food
m
to order to blow the nose
m
girl to pull a string
HOT
nerve 20 wahs D.P. of string
rays of the sun sword I^^^P®' *^^-
A.
colour, mill stone, beautiful, to rub
imz
timid to unravel chronic
m
to please to meet
Wjj
orange sour
^jj
becoming to join
ftj
to smoke tobacco to suck to pump
mxi
garden to verify
^n
ripe cooked vivid
( 320 )
Vi
m plague measure of rainfall
m to look for, without (negation)
wy to be lost to be cured
m to exercise herpes
m box to press sugar-cane between
MBU asthma to pack up '-
wn six to fall down
W3J to clothe oneself to press down
WQ3J perfume onion
wu times way
ra to be anxious about ring of a chain
m^ to scourge to mow sugar mould
^u puppet mould
Q
gu musty damage
Biy first (month) low fellow !
iitiLi to hide oneself box
you self
j,m one noise
OB reed to stammer oh !
aa rather deaf tumult
an a draught of water turbulent
(321)
ENGLISH— SIAMESE
VOCABULARY.
^V, B. This vocabulary merely contains the
words used in the exercises and passages for
translation from English into Siamese in this
book.
A an ■m.i im-^ to be f^used All
with a suitable designa-
tory particle
About djrwiui
Round about q^ jqu
Abuse, revile ^t
According to ^^jj
Address= ^-^^
to speak to
Address (place) ^^^, i^iu^
Advance (to) 1%^ W h
Afternoon
Again
Ago jji am
Agree ^n m flii'il r'jiw wq is
on ^ wuj' an
Agreement ■mmn ^njnji
WM3J^ YIJ nv.
All day long ™ m fiS
Almost intiu
Alms vi™
To ask alms tib vnu
Always mun
Amount (of 0,^, ^„ . n|
money) ^™™^n'^^^^
And iis lisit fiu
Angry "tn5f
Another un ™ vw.^ fiv.
Another person R^4 au
Ant 3J^
Answer
Any
iJlQU
UW
Anyone Wk|lK
Appearance gg,^ iM^Q^i
= clear m^i d
Army
Around
Arrest
Arrive
Ashes
At
At all
At first
At once
At present imi u iv. am u
Att
Aunt
Away
Bad
Bald
Baker
Bamboo
( 322 )
Bank of a river r^^
Bank note m rtTtmu m^um
nQJTO
lilts
irn
li
^ ii5n
Is
TJ1 tJl
i\
B.
Lu 61' "B-J
,n?5
Barn
Barrack Ih nwu
Bangkok nj,^ iviw i
Bathe mu ^4l
Beat ^
Beautiful (of persons) j^^y
Beautiful (of things) n%x
Bear (animal) m£i
l,v.) fia
Because iwjx aHii
Bed itisj^
Bed room wa^ uq-u
Beef ma
Before (time) xmx^
„ (place) «Dl^^ii
Beggar R^i •Da vnu
T15 Wai
Bank(money) utim Fim Tto
Begin
Behind
Believe
Belong
Bet
ilia
( 323 )
Betel nut wwin
Between lu ^tvih
Bill (account) m Viwm mu
,, (notice) tlj^nw
Bill collector fiw itIu m
Bite n^
Bird un
Black fi\
Blacksmith tli^ mm
Bloom mu
Blind m uori
Blow (wind) M
,, [an instrument) isli
,, (n.) mj Rti
Blotting paper nzmu %ij
Blue (light) ^lli
(dark) ^uiifu' rhjj
Boat ifa
Boatman ej wi^j- Ht4 ifo
Bold nm winj
Book MUj^Qj $!i^^
Born (to be) ifi^
Borrow
Both
Bottle
Box
Boy (child) i^n | •am
,, (servant) vn^
Break w uijin
a limb wn
Bread titiw dj
Brick Bj
Bride i^i mi
Bridegroom h'i tJig
Bring jbi • • • • ui
Brother (elder) ^ tny
,, (younger) tltiiTny
Buffalo mi^i
Build 2?ri^
Bury d^
Busy ilni5 3-nn' ws^jjin
Business mj b^
Butter iyy
Buy fa
But m
( 324 )
jjiin
'!lt43J
By means of l^y ^'^^x
By means of this L^y v.
0.
Call
Cake
Can
Cannot
Canada
Canal rkb^
Card (playing) Iw
,, (visiting) u^n iO^jj
,, (of invitation) rn(?i
Carpenter tIu IIj
Careful jqiUU
Be careful rS^
Carriage 5n
Carry
Cat
Catty
Catch
Cave
Celebrated fl to im^
Certain m
A certain
man f\v, ww
Certainly
idu im
Chair
1. &
Change (v.
) diyu
Change (
money) ifii li^n
Chance (n
.) lomFi
By chance wtifiu
Cheque
lu ifln ifi4 1^^
Cheap
51R1 ^n
Cheese
114U inj
Chew-
iR^;
Chili
W5n
Child
f)n i^n
ii3J3
Chimney (of lamp) wsiofi
,, (of mill) tl^j'aj
'China dnviR ^i4
China wareiWEw ttiii
Chinese iw
Cigar f^ra
Cigar tube mm i^jto
Cigarette t^w ^mif^
Clean (adj.) stqi^
,, (v.) IKf^ Vll ll^ ?IQ1FI
( 325 )
Climb lu ilu
Cost (n.) nm
Climate tnniR
Cotton ^i%i
Cloth eJl
„ W00l?fl^
Clothes ila eJl
Count uu
Coal mi4 m
Country iJKiyipr
Coast a^ vitiK
„ asopp.
to town mti \mvi
Coachman i?ii4 to 50
Covered jto
Cocoanut wrwri^
Coyan in3lji4
Coffee m ny\
Crab t
Collect i™ • • It-
Cremation mj m
Colour n
Crowd mi
Come 3JT
11
Company j^^n
Crucible itji
Cup ma
Mercantile Co. ufm
Considerable nilu um du
Cupboard |
Qu win
Cure jhfen miu
Consult iJ^nfen
Curry imj
Convict (v.) mX'nu
Cut m
,, (n.) tin tviM
D.
Coolie n^
T
Cook ' mm
Dark fi?i
Copy (v.) ^lon ''i^ • • • Ig-
Darn "pti iCfu
Corner vq ^jj
Day 014
Correct V^
Day time m^ n?^-ii w
( 326 )
Day after to- ^
morrow idu m
Day before yes- ^ ^
terday mi w m
Do
Do not
Doctor
MJJQ
Deaf ^ VtUiu
Dog
MU1 ^un^
Dear iim
Down
m %\i 'vny
Dear me ! nv \-i%] !
Dozen
"tw^i
Diamond iv^tf
Drawing-room mi ju utin
Dice im
Dress (v. )
iig)^ m
Die (v.) m<ii
„ (n.)
mo
Different from muv.
Drink (v.)
nii ^w
Different kind m i
„ (n.)
Tim liw
Difficult ?Jin
Drive (v.)
TO 5tl
Dim m
„ away
L
Dine fti tJj:vnu qtou
Drum
nsim
Dining-room rai su oivnj
Drunk
ijji mm
Dinner qtois i;?:i i^u
Dry (adj.)
JSM^
Dirty jrniJsn iQqij
„ (V.)
?nn jj^n
Discover wu
Duck
ii!^
Disease Im
Dumb
llj
Dislike lu nau mm^
Dust
2^:!]B^ eji
Dismiss 1.?i oon Id im
Dusty
fl ^tam
Disturb 'wilMgii ™
Divide um vn5
( 327 )
E.
Each 'pn
Each man fiusi:
Earth Piu
Earth(The)t85n.
Easy
Easily
Eat
Egg
Elder
Elderly
A.
Electric lightl?*! I^i
Elephant «
Employment ^™ ms vii jji
wifiu
Endeavour s^b^ |i w h
End tlsii^ vi |f5i
End of the month lu iHo-u
England dsrivipi !Mnt]fe
English Q5nt]M
Enough SNQ
Envelope itqj
Equal m m
Especially "t^iij ailuSj
Europe wtl ytd
European fJjl
Evening am i^u
Ever iRy
Every vin •]
Everybody -^n i ru
Everywhere vm*] uw>^niJ
Every time vj^n vi
Explain oftiifj
Extinguish m
F.
Fair iisj 2^i?j
= light tni
Fall i?in z^j mj
Fare m Iny ^rij
Farm w
Farmer %-a ui
Fat q™
Father m um
Fence 5^
Fetch=call lil ifun
,,=bring Id ib>--3ji
Fever 1^
( 328 )
Few iisi uh^
Field m
Find nu wi
Fine (ad.) ji3j
,, (n)(v) dfu
Finish 'viiIm mij'^^i
Fire W ma?
First 'w Vtw
Fish (n.) iJ?)i
,, (v.) Kn il^n
Five
Flax
Flower
Fly(v.)
„ (n.)
Fold
Fond
Food
Fool
Foolish
Foot
nam fa
m
,, (12 inches) i}!^
For
mwjt]
Forget
Fork
Fortune
Four
France
Friday
Friend
Fruit
Fuang
J53J
TtQJJ
mnii
G.
?)n
iK
Gamble
Gambling house tsjuou
Garden mu,
Gardener fiu Vii ??;t4
Gentleman ru |i ri
Get up §in '^li
Ghost
Girl
Give
Glad
Glass
Glue
Go
?
iQl • • • ui Iw
m3
Id
( 329 )
Go out
BQfl \}
Hat
wwin
Gooutforj
iwalk Wi^tjQi^u
He, him
ill! iin
Go out for
aridelili^iii^sJi
Head
TO mt
Go out foradrivelili^yi m
Headache
dg^ mt
Go round
W3JU mu
Health
mMJ ?sm^
Good
^
Hear
€t4
Good bye m mu
Good natured \^ P\
Heavy
Help
■mu
Goose
1A^^i
Hen
Iri
Grand father y m
Here
fi v.
Granary
mi m
High
¥
Grass
Hold
Green
iw;
Hole
\
Ground
m f\
Holiday
014 M^^ JIU
Grow
ran
Home
tjlu
,, of personlwry lii
Hope
ral'^
Gun
^u
Horse
1^
Hail
H.
^n iwu
Hospital
Hot
Hand
Happy
^1^
„— peppery im
Hotel \mm
Harvest
Have
House
However
( 330 )
How muchivlilj
Hundred ra^j
Hungry m
Htirt(adj.)i^!J
,, (v.) iim
Husband wl
I.
mi ej3j Trnm
I
Ice
Ice cream laTr^nlu
If m
If so vS tidij uv.
Ill I'SU
In I'U Ti^ ll4
In front of « lii
Instead of uvivi
Imprison m^u 4i ^n
Inch w
India iJkivir fiujiiy
Indian iitin
Inform usn lii' I"
Information tlii
Inherit ( of fortune) ju
Ink mm
Inkstand nst^n mud
Inn \tiw\i\ i^n •]
Inn keeper i4i tib^ IsiR?^
In order to iwq s:
Invite ifti)
Invitation ni i^nj
J.
Jar v(m
Jump nst^^
Jungle tJi
Just now ifia ^tn
K.
i^fi 1
\.m^ (animals)
inu ••• b
■JIT
Keep
Kill
Kind (sort) am?
„ (adj.) 1^ t\
Kindly fm U nsjmi
,, —please TIB
Kindness h;i3j nsfvn
( 331 )
Kitchen
msm
Let or allow \vr
Knife
m
,, (a house) ImifT
Know
l<u
House to let tHii w
Tj
Letter
Wiwlo '^^l^lll
XJ«
Light (V.)
^^
Lad
i^n ^'ii^
„ (adj.)
iiui Iw mr]
Lamp
Kim^
,, (n.)
mv\\
Landing stage vii
„ (adj.)
mi
Laos
mi
Like (v.)
HQU
Large
knj tpi
„ (adj.)
iMWQVi
Last
vi'wm
Listen
fi.
Last month imu mxi u
Little
inn m^i
Last week
: OlfKll flQli M
Live (v.)
r
-4 k
a^
Last year
U flJ^lU M
Late
lij mi m%i
„ (adj.)
ti^m
Laugh
mill
Loaf
nhu (ti\43j ijj)
Lazy
^im'^
London
iWm ?)QU^B1i
Leaky
h
fl^J ?iaUFlB14
Learn
fj^u
Long
in;
Leave
Ban ''^in
Look
|i um
Left hand
Till
Lose (v.)
m M1U
Left
mm
,, (not to win) m
Leg
"tn
Loud
m
( 332 )
Low
h im
Mend
utT
Low quality i?i^
Military band 3^ nm vimu
Mine
UQ UJ
•
M.
Miner
HU Tl^ iij
Machine
wf imm 4t](
Minute (adj.) i^n i
Mad
m
,, (of time) 'u™ SQ^
Magic
n8^3J15yi
Mistake
m m^
Make
m
Moment
m rJ viw
Malay
%itm^
Money
ifl4
Man
f\\i d'lnu wyyfj
Monday
Tv. Hum
Many
Msny
Month
imu
Manger
Moon
mt ^T4TIJ
March
i^U IN5Q3J
Morning
am m
Margin
iJRW
Mosquito
^3
Market
l?l?51^
Mother
aw ■u^m^
Mat
V] a VI 1
Mouldy
ti^ihii
Matches
lu t1^ W
Mountain
Oi'ai
Matter
iMi^ m5
Mouse
M14
What is the matter iiiuot'b
Mouse trap mfm m^u
Meat
mn
Mouth
dm
Meddle
mxi
Much
win
Medicine
%}-]
Must
R°QJ
Meet
■nn dt
Mutter
nj:fij
( 333 )
My °!iQi m
Myself m. lal
N.
Name ^a
Narrow iiwti
Nature ■ wnm
Near \rm
Nearly inoti
Neck RB
Needle hjj
Nephew vtmu Tnu
Net UM
New Iwii
News tIi^
Newspaper 's^ wuiy m^
ww^B www
New Year mf\
Never 12^11
Next 1510 Iti ^Q nu
Next day w^j ft
Next month i^Q\4 will
Next week mm%i mxi
Next year u wtli
Night na-w Ru
Night time i^ai n?^ij Fiw
Late at night m
Night fall m^ m h
No not IIiIti 111 idki
None ill w lau lii w Irj
Noon m^ mw
Not at home Iw oii uIij
Not very lii |
Nothing 111 il nz\
Note (n.) -^^Majiti
November wrjRsmu'u '
Now i^y: fi
o.
Obliged. =raust m^
,, pleased w mm ?\m
Oboe u
Often m%i •]
Oil 'ui uu
kerosene oil w iixi mpi
Of course m uu
Old (of person) iin
( 334 )
Old (of thing)ifn tunm
On nu "fl^ uu
Only (one only) imi
,, (adv.) muu
Open (v.) iti^
Opium ?J1 ^14
Opposite ?iK nw ni
,, = other side of the
river y\^u °r\i \xm
Or wfa
Orange m
Order (v.) m
,, (n.)mm
,, (series) um vi
In order to mo 's:
Other Bu
ilium
Oven
Owe
Owing to iyj5i:^K^
Owner
Packet
Paddy
P.
MB
Pail m
Pair §
Paint m ^
Palace :°3
Royal palace wj:mf ;J
Pale (adj.) wi%^
Paknam din ^l^
Paknampo din -m \n
Paper rurE^nfe
Part J?™
Passers by nu fi iHu lu fiuvi
Passing place v\mr\
Patient(adj.) u min imi
,, (n.) R\4 I'SU
Pattern en mv imu
Pay
Pen
Pencil ^u 2^0
Perfectly X^si mu rqu
\^%i iiU
People "ill; ni^gj nu
Person fw.
, =one's own self m jm
dm m
( 335 )
Pick=choose i^an
Pick up iiltJ
Pig v^^
Place vi im mu?i
Plank n3:^iii llJ
Plant (n.) m Vlt^^
,, (v.) mx d|in
Plate '^lu
Play mv,
Play polo t\ m
Please "tia i^nj
,, (v.) TIDU 1'^
Pleased u rqijj Su^? ^ 1'^
Pleasant n\fwx ?riJitJ
Plenty win- tiiiW
Plough (v. )1.ti 141
Poetry tivi nsioii
Poison ^1 WHW
Poisonous u ^Hw
Policeman y^!5 mt\M
Police station tw fin
Poor '^li
Possible IK' iiJt4lill^''
mi
Post
,,=(duty)Mtlivi
,, (military ■« wn vimis
Post office iHldrautj
Pot W3JB
Precious stone ?\i?aoy
Prefer t(qiu li n^i
Present (n.) °!ib^ riiiiii
,, (adj.) !]|i' ipi'q wfii
Present time i;?ii i^y^ fi
At present tJ^ v,
Presently iJsti^^j^
Pretty ni%i iiw
Previously noii
Price 51R1
Procure vn Iw
Procession im
Promise ^djj ^ryfyi
Properly t^ii ?i3JR15
Prosperous Cl waiu I'sfnj
Province ajniin^^
Pull fi^ mx\ #1
Pulldown ra
Pure
Put
Quick
Quickly
Quiet
Ifi' iTmim
im ■
Q.
d
in
l^y in
( 336 )
Recognise "=51 1^
Red URJ
Remain
Remains
■u:r
R.
Race (of mankind) n
,, (horse fniTij 3j1
Railway Jo li^
Rain (n.) ^m.
,, (v.) du ^n
Rarely ayu utiii
w mi m mi
mu
•^Ts im 'siH
Rather
Razor
Reach
Read
Really
Reap
Rebuild
Receive
Reception roomwm m uTin
Repeat
Reply
Rest (v.)
„ (n,) fi fin
,, (adj.) muv\ mm
Rest of life i?iaa^ •aSij
Restore n^u ru ru 1m
,, (health) ffiwlf^dm^
Respect (v. ) uupq
In every respect lu pn
iJ5tm5
Return
Revolve
Rice Ai
Rickshaw 5n I'sn
Ride °1 3j1
Right ^n
Right (hand) tigi
Ring (n.) awn
tni tigi
( 337 >
River
uii m
Scratch
im m
Road
nut4
Scythe
m iRu;
Rock
wu m^
Sea
Yi:i25
Room
ms
Season
^^
Rotten
^ IWUl
Secret
•tim m m
Row (order) urn
See
'mu fj
,, (a boat)
iHQ ifa
Sell
"fill
„ (noise)
on riKVin
Send
ni---- Id
Rule (v.)
w m
Send away dm ••••Id
Ruler
Wlil
Seriously
win l^y 45? *)1
,, (wooden) ItjunYi^
Servant
R14 m
Ruled (line) i^ii mm
Seven
is^
Run
^Id
Sharp
RW
s.
Sharpen
m \v\ Rw
Sad
mil Is
Shield
!d
Saddle
0114 3J1
Shoot
Qj
Salung
m^
Shop
r\M mi
Salt
ifl^B
Shopman
"UlU m'i^
Same
wwQU nu
Short
Saturday
w mij
,, (of pel
rsons) iitJ
Sawk
mn
Shoulder
di
Say n
|i 'ji> uon 3i5 iki gi
jShout
!q} m^f w
School
u^ ifiiu
^Show
^
r 338 )
Siam ifiQ^lvi'ij'iJa'viR sryi3j
Son yiFif Tiiy
Siamese
IyiI) FI\4
\y\%i
Soon ul iJjriliy;
Similar
iwflQti rm
Sow MQTU
Since
M ii^
Spacious nrij ni;i^
Sit
■UJ
Spare time n?si ii3
Six
wn
Speak iji^ ^1
Sky
^^
Spectacles mu ^^
Slave
Yiw tji;
Spirits iw^i srsi
Sleep
■UQU -UQU mu
Split eji
Slow
i'^
Spoon 'TOu
Small
i^n
Square i mmv
Smell (v. )
^3J
Stag ngi^
,, (good)
wow
Stamp I V.) mtm (foot)
,, ibad)
miju
,, (seal) iJjtviu mi
Smoke (v.
) fti Lira
,, (n.) mii^iutl
„ (n.)
mu
,, (n.) m [■dmm
Snake
{
Stand (v.) %iu
Snatch
mu
Start Dan sin
Snow
Vtlit
Stay oil
Soil (nJ
fiu
Steal ^:t3jy
Soldier
VI 1115
Steam boat ifa n?j 1^
Some
1-
°J1!
Stick (n.) llj
Sometimes uit ft
,, (v.) m
( 339 )
Stone mi
Stop v\^^
Storey mi
Story Civnu
Stomach ms
Stomach achediFi #1^
Storm SN^
Stout niv
Street ^mu
String i^Q-fi
Strong n%i im
Stupid "li
Sugar ui m^
Sufficient wo
Sun ?N5:aiviwy
SunUght imn
Sunday Tu mm%i
Sure im
Surprised ^n 1'^
Suit of clothes im Mu
Suit (sight) V. m !?ii^
Sweet v^-i-m
Swim g^y ^fi
A
ViliJ
T.
Table "t^:
Table cloth eJi d tfc
Tail v\M
Take im Id
Take away loi • • • -Id \m
Tale QviTu
Tall ^i
Take care srfj
That, those w
They, them m
This, these fi
Target lui
Taste f jj
Tea tri TIT
Teacher m
Tell tan
Temple g>i tuti
Than ri^r
Then ^j
There vi w
There is, there are w
Therefore imizmuu
Thief Ti:tutJ
Thin (of person) wqjj
,, (of things) ui^
Thing nia^
Think m uu
Thirty 2^i3J iti
Though win ii
Thread ^r^
Three wnu
Through ^nnf\
Thunder wi aw
Thursday 2u !Nr]Mi^tili
Tical tJiYi
Tiger iiri
Time i^^n
Time (long) ijiu
Tin wyn
Tin mine tJa uj Fi^tin
Tired mCioii
To vi fij
,, (dative) iih
To-day in u
To-morrow mu
( 340 ).
Too inii
Too late '^'i ini4 id.
Too much ifiti \\
Together wfau rwx' m%\ nt4
Tortoise m^
Total 513J
Town iwQj
I
ITrader mm
I,, petty trader ?\u titj tiq^
Train jci Ivl
JTram car 50 51:! jn la
Tram conductor ru mu Sj
iTramway 10 u m ju
'Tramway Co. ujisfvi jn ju
I Travel ifiu yiu
|Traveller u mv, -vth
jTread iwyyti
ree ^u Ly
Try aa? u pyw
Trustworthy ^Q
Turban tri twn rr:
Turn mj
Turn down im
Twenty S m
Two SfB^
Typhoid fever \Hm
U.
Umbrella iw
Uncle ^i
Under n m
Underneath lli
Unripe m
Use 1%
Useful w dstyu^
V.
Vacant 'iv
Valley vaii m
Valuable w jifii win
Verandah zims
Very win iln
Visit jflijw
w.
Wages ifu i^Qii
Wah 31
Wait RQy
Walk im\}
Walking stick IIj m
( 341 )
Wall
fj
Want inamij Q?jin lli
Wash m
Wash clothes ■#!
Washerman rt4 f n ma
Waste mtj idioj
Watch (n.)\4iwniwn
„ (v.) ieii
Watchman Rii jeji mt4ni4?ji3j
Water tli
Way (road) mis viu m^
. , method 11
We i3i
Wealthy ti m idu ii^5fej|
Weapon ww q"^
Weather ainiR
Week mm%i
Weep 5m Iw
Well n
Well (healthy) ?iiJiy P\
Well known '^ ru ^ '^n nu^
Wet idun
Weight w mu
( 342 )
When
ifla
,, (timber) IjT
When ?
iCiolj
Wooden n°i ^y laT
Where
ft Xviu
Word Ri
Whereupon %
Worth seeing w gi
Whether
vsm
Work (n.) j™ b^: ms
While
Tim: ifla
,, (v.) Wilt4 101 m5
Whisky
mm nif\
Write Huu
White
tii
Wrong incorrect m\j pn
Who
f\ ^i
,, (bad) in
Who?
1r5
1.
Whoever
Yard (3ft.) ran
Why
Yard (court yard)s^uiJJ wryi
Year i
Wide
DQIJ
Widow
iijj W3j1ll
Wife
ifly nnyi
Yellow ^ iM^o^
Win
'ilUt
Yesterday git; ■S
1 1^
Winner
% ISlMt
IJJD 3TU t!
Window
1
Yes 4t
Yonder l-^^i
Wine
ttiXi
M'ish
T
TiQij a^in iff
You iHTu im i4i
Your °!iQJ "vItu
With
^gy l^y
Young wyu
With draw uoii oan
z.
Wood (forest) ui
Zero fuj
( 343 )
SIAMESE ENGLISH
VOCABULARY.
This Vocabulary contains words with appro-
priate meanings for exercises and passages for
translation in this book from Exercise 46 onwards.
Many common words which occur in the earlier
part of the book have not been repeated in this
vocabulary. The Arrangement of words is as
follows. High words are marked *
( i ) The letters are arranged in the order
of the Siamese alphabet.
( ii ) The words under each letter are ar-
ranged as follows.
A.
Words whose first
vowel.
syllable
ends in a simple
B.
99
,, sound of N.
C.
99
99 99 Ng.
D.
9*
99 K.
E.
99
99 T.
F.
99
99 P-
G.
* 9 9 9 9 9
99
99 M.
H.
99 "9 99
99
,, diphthong.
fit 1 til bag packet
n:iwi:(l)basket(2^stomach
115^=511 looking glass
r\K'^w basket
(1) to rush upon (2) tent
nj:^iu plank
UTM bell
nit^m paper
rwrt^^ to jump
nj:my rabbit
nr.vw flower pot
fijtVii to do
( 344 )
n
njtCia
fijtviransn iviii
Ministry of ^^'ar!
k
njtlj
ria
m
mid
nri
fifin
n
n tii^f
iDMfJlLI
nj:Yi5;}injyi?iji sms
Ministry of Agriculture V^^
nj:vi53wid5:i'viB hnm
Minis, of Foreign affairs
Ministry of Local Govt
njtvinwww liny
Ministry of the Interior
Ministry of Justice tnwn
iifi
In?)
In
In?^
InK'jRyj
buffalo
state procession
tile
what
sailor
King
to build
crow tea pot
coffee
bold
brave
behaviour
how many
what is the time
rose
virtue health
pollen
(l)to (2) old
far
hen
near
neighbouring
liar
( 345 )
iW h
chair
mj^
to respect
riiilu
ship
ITO
bold
muw^
city wall
lira
rapids
rii1j
profit
nm
heap, troop
miltJ
to get worse
riBJ 2^Q^ imw
flw
force
secret ]
police, detectives
■riwii^
fixed appointed
nm
small box
fiu (1) with (2) to prevent
in
cook
rfti
to separate
nr|W3Jiy
laws
mj
work, business
m\
to bite
m5 m Till
trade
m
actions
ms nmi
betting
fi^
to hinder
niJ 5U rm
war
tnji
angry
1^,514
a little
iny-^i Finn lazy
riou
before
itWiimf^
honour
ITDTi
piece
lum^
to hate
in'u ItJ
to much
im
to be born
njj
cage
mj iTi
food
n?an5
middle
um
back
ngiJ
wide
niti to cut with scissors
n;^ jfii
Ayuthia
inu
to collect
n^^ mn i
Bangkok
njjjjmj
committee
up tits PI
Paris
nsumyilmjEducationDep.
( 346 )
iinii
cheek
iTiWi'Ti
I
inu
even accustomed
Ti5mmj
officials
nsiiy
transformation
TO8^3iiviFnritJi8^
mii
to tell to inform
High Commissioner
am (1) glass (2) valuable
%
to ride
nm
banana
mntj-s
idle
inyg
to connect
^imv}
stingy
to have business with
grumbler
egg
feather, fur
a title Khoon
to fear
island
b U
nit4
a
piiij nobleman officals
"imt
while
ut:u
to hang up
niawy
thief
mu
to write
°D:yiy
to enlarge
nnu wf
' Paklat
TJB
to ask for
tR
to imprison
IIQ vi™
to beg for alms
iiTO toobstruct,opposition
IB lV)W
to beg pardon
rij
side
2-
■ilQ
article, chapter
'Clil'U
inside
in
leg
ft tmi
yonder
■n rm In?
jaw
« ■UBD
outside
1)31
right hand
rij wa°i
behind
( 347 )
in-a
district
^Tuli to salute
TIBJ
(1) of (2) goods
m aj order
%m mm
I present gift
Hu TiQ Tiiu beggar
iiTin
(1) Indian
Ru w 3ti coachman
(2) visitor
HM \i' servant
''m\'^
angry annoyed
Ru^^y mv. passenger
■#1 ?iV.
poor
F\u mu nsi conjuror
'am
mv. smoke
l)entirely (2)to bebroken
Ru to separate
1^
to dig
mu ma afraid of
TO
to cross
m 1) evening 2)to restore
in^
to sell
f\m wave
ti^y
flute
^fu (1) a title (2) favour
PI
^v. im intimate
Kf\
lawsuit
t Rii stump (of a tree)
Fitum
to become wild
RQj ought to
m
price
m WW once upon a time
m 4i^
hire
m i^h) dew
m
namely
\r\nm canal
^\
teacher
m [1) screw(2)to brandish
^
pair
mw close to
\m
to wish for
imm materials apparatus
wi
(1) word (2) piece
mm m m^ mouse trap
imm iiQ tools
( 348 )
Ray
imi
■'iv,
theatrical properties
Han enclosure, corral
n^ to bend
m to think
UHH gas
R51J complete
m kheub
iiRu narrow
imnu iiFisiJto doubt
Mm im%i to forget
m-iii w 4a^ opposition
F131U WQ 1-^ satisfaction
Fi;i3j Si4 ^ pleasure
RQiw ^"ii happiness
m to be in charge of |,^ pig-ijj
Irw lantern
large hanging lamp
iHu ever
Figw buffalo
Rsig fi on this occasion
to wait
to chew
"51
to kill
enemy
to flog
stupid
reflection
work
tm imu salary wages
J1W handsome, pretty
m easy
Ht ?it m confusedly
SI chief
substance of an affair
P\ good natured
141 njw director
i'sri ^m proprietor
i-fiwiliii™ manager
'^MiiM amount
( 349 )
4^ iilu
important
tsviy
plaintiff
4-\ isiii
defendant
411
to catch, to arrest
-^14
(1) poor (2) until
liv
ill, sick
'^TU
dish
'^v
to sink
^u
Chinese
4Mi
to pay
i-^u accustomed to, expert
iisg wiy to row
tsjnli
robber
gable
43 v\m
sub-district
i-^X
to bore, to dig out
■€?
true
•n
&
then
nnm
savage
iiHi
manifest
UV.V.
and so
l.i^s mm
to inform
jawx
sufficient
^n
to tear up
u?i'm
clever
I'^n
Chinese
inm illumination, festival
ii'^n -^iiii
to distribute
mi
I
'=)^
to note down
^u
pungent
■^^t^WTiJ
letter
?«
to pull, to drag
<#!
5tJ Mil
ruined
(1) strong (2Uo prepare
my
indifferent, listless
-#1 iHj
to arrange
Q^U
to seize
si?)jU
heart
"Q
tasteless
Ti:^:
to win
«ilf)
to light
■^rft^
kind, sort
•3Q!J
( 350 )
h \.\.H% explain to point out
^Q name
^a xmi ^ famous
I'B'mQy to make use
of a person's services
i'Bi to rent
'ai5: to decide
mi storey, grade, form
vm for example
•mu spoon
tR (l)to weight (2) catty
Tiunu-u j^ii painter artist
'bs. \%i carpenter
^M m?sn blacksmith
^j to snatch away
'im gap,opportunity,hole
to box TiQ'u im
to pull Tin TfU
to influence ir^
to wipe
to like
to praise
to taste
inhabitants
Tn; mm townsfolk, people
•315 OTtj garden
Tn (1) bad (2) period
to trust, to believe
iTiO
K5
Tin ni4
fn
Tin TI5U
|3J many, plentiful li^ titu ruined
distinct, legible
race, nation
connected
fiddle
crest
to buy
chain
naughty
to hide
naughty
pale
TO to hide
T(Qu ijKjj to repair
fitj left hand
( 351 )
^iJ
m
to extinguish
l?^n|
large, big
m
unripe
miu
Annamite
im
at first, former
ej
fol
^li
star
71
m%i
with
^ (1) fierce (2) to scold.
^ nu
savage
^
1.
whoever
^imw
lamp
m?i
to command
^:nsit
greedy
mi
to break through
^tnm
to lean on one side
mu
custom house
mv, uin
west
m earth, ground land
i5iJu Ban
east
imii m
ii^i4 adjoining
Wi^l^
market
\^\i
to collide
^^■Q^
through
finu
softly
m
to join together
mii
hasty-
ra Id
for the future
imu
month
m i'
to conquer
mim
and so
W5"l^
balance, scales
m
to catch
^ITOU
to .despise
i^n
child
cupboard
^an \
flower
\i\ mv>,
to interrogate
n^^
Sun
ii?n J
stove, oven
imF,
to boil
7
( 352 )
i^°iiiMi4j position
rank, appointment
place, locality
low
oneself
plant
tree
(1) stopped up
(2) at a loss
to awake up
empty, clear
to remind
straight
to establish
various
m w
to carry water
m
house, building
iMr\
to break
Kt]T\
lane alley
m
to cut
m
to join
'<m'i'^
to inspect
li?itj
to strike, to slap
\mu
to answer
'm
to boil
'mii
to follow, following
m^
to die
large
(?n^
1
mj wn besides,in addition
im to arrange
iJa m to dress
im^ bed
>in to fall
9,n I's to be startled
m tn ^111 to be drowned
i?in ilm to fish
1
1 1
road, street
to offer, to present
permanent
to hold, to carry
to pull out
correct
(l)to(2)toreach
money bag
( 353 )
m^ (1) to make slower
(2) to sink
it\w rm to quarrel
^n (i) cheap (2) correct
m since after
x\tif\ to take off
m to push with the foot
tl3J
(1) abundant (2) enamel
m?j (i) to redeem
v\^%l m to pour out
iitig row line
nay to retire
my cup
vfTxi am glass
VI
Yitiuu'w account book
v):i?> sea
m^x to quarrel
viMij soldier
■WQ l'^ to be cowardly
m^ to paint
vii (1) landing stage
(2) appearence
m m
times
y\ ijou mattress
uv) very
ivn nii equal
only
m foot
viiljj why
(1) to support (2) patient
vm punctual
vituTi'tTiy punishment
Yiu capital, money
imv. instead of
i.mu candle
* viH wj:njuiT
to be kind, to*^avour
* Y15J w5:Ei°iiQ'u to go, to walk
together
all
all
mj road, way
viQj gold
viBJ ij^i copper
&
■vir
(354 )
■y]m imm brass
Yin
vin°ti
mu
stomach
to exact
each every
misfortune
slave
5553Jmy3J
UR5
joss stick
ordinary, usual
custom
m point of the compass
w€m to cheat to swindle
i^s false
VI a ^ to cast
viQ^^ai^ auction sale
wealth, property
to know
almost
not very good
(1) to harness
(2) to compare
iviBw^r Thomas
Toiu stern helm
viay to throw out
mna
¥15111
iiVILI
V1513J
IViUSJ
6'
town, city
•UR5 ^n^w Korat
ujjlfms to worship
uigi boat
ruiwni clock, watch
ill in front
uims window
\v\-ur\ mii
i shameless, impudent
'm 111 to run a ^vay
jjm »] truly
hi in
llu r^mv between
mvii
Mt
bank note
business
pui
{ui
rotten
to lead to conduct
water
tea
sugar
( 355 )
■uiMiTn
weight
uti m
to respect
wmi.
oil
iu
soft
iiW
firmly closely
U3JJ
(1) lined with
unu V\m
to be fast asleep
cloth (2) cloak
mvi
hillock
WW
smooth
V\Ui
skin leather
lUSJ
butter
■mmti ^m newspaper
mu inj
cheese
w
quiet
Ulii VI W5
officer
WUBi
(1) marsh (2) pus
finger, inch
un
bird
k t^
toe
Mu iim
parrot
W14B1I
little
"uriH'jtJ'u
canary
UQSJ
little
Tin w^
whistle
iMUQ
north
ilnilyu
school boy
il4Q
meat, flesh
uni^^i hooligans, rowdies
■un
to think
U
■uon sin
besides except
djyjui
plentiful
■u"^
desig, particle
ultni?)
to eat
of guns in salutes
Mj;™
neighbourhood
U?l 1^113
a very little
mwi
Company
xi^ miIbu
a little
(mercantile)
C'^UJOj
continually
ifjOTi
pure
dtj to count to reckon
9^
U1
mad
( 356 )
vm father
\m^tu ancient
iLii (1) light (adj)
(2) to go slowly
tJi5,j to strenghten
uu to grumble
m\ ladder staircase
IJ5MJ to do carefully
•unm tribe, company
ujj^n to load
mp^ to make pro-
clamation to command
uiu to blossom to open
uirij^ accounts
Ban Kamin (a town)
tri-u \4Qn up-country
rustics, peasants
m bill
m to fly
yoj luck, fortune, merit
au'u thin, flat
m to hide
wm to rule, to ordain
umii
LIIJ
mm li;
un
wn
to do homage
fortunately
daring, bold
some, any
Bank
on one side
in future
land
to tell
lesson, chapter
now
wound
(1) to twist
(2) dysentery
son
daughter
to enter the
priesthood
plan, pattern
slave
cowrie shell
large
cushion
( 357)
iJ
to meet
iJ5:nQLi
djtTn
djt'jiu
dn^y;
d5:^
dj:vnii
ds^ivipi
* djtmj
dstmm
d:
d?r^n5J4 assistant
or deputy official
■ilm pn^^Bj Vice-MinisterdstnTifi
dgtJ^ to support
dsnij
particulars, point, way
dsrmpi notice
djtn;^ to compete
composed of
now
to stay in
multitude
people, populace
meeting
to decorate
presently
door
to give
country
to sit
usage, custom
djtwr]^ behaviour manners
dstiJim about
to fix a price
to despise
use, useful
wonderful
to be astonished
desire
to join
to throw
forest, jungle
year
last year
oboe, bagpipe
(1) to pave with
(2) crab
Post office
to blow
to mix
dacoit
to divide
ii
\im%i
lUI
d
12^14
tlnjnji
reason,
talent, intelligence
( 358 )
llTU
equal, like
pin
im to open
id^ v\mn to raise the hat
LiiilMnJ cannon, artillery tifij to fine
pound sterling £
to change
at the time when
to bake
to construct
■iims (1) tube (2) chimney
^m rm to take care, to
take precautions
to strip
to govern
to fix, to plant
mouth
pen
to deliberate
to plant
strange curious
to desire
without
to shut
please
tlnu dnu to conquer, to
subdue
Jfuu to compare,
for example
un
din
dinm
dtjnw
d^n
udsin
dnnui
djii^'^Ti
d^
?^QW
counterfeit
fort
end, extremity
djiiEiy to loose, to set free
ill, sick
m^
112%}
li
i&JiiB (1) proud (2) to
soar (3) to come willingly
wiHti well, healthy
m cloth
w ghost
w to became rotten
^ih m; manager
fp\ gentleman
^im vn^ traveller
^wm mj commissary
( 359 )
ej3
savage, brigaijd pIj crowd, flock, pack
wound
produce, advantage ^n w>) to drill, to practice
in
to send
concerning, on
the side of
fruit eJiy
flat, sheet
earth, world ^un^w
(l)to substitute chamberlain manager
(2) to pull hard
to fasten to tie
wrong
(1) I, (2) hair
thin
husband
eJi (1) wall (2) lid
(\mw partition wall
palm of the hand
skill
to watch, to
have audience of
* SMStl'^l an ^liTO
lUl
ram
to dream
coast
w^itjijj patience
wyii4 witness
* mt uii3 palace windows
* wsisl um yiiBB the title
of the. King's brothers
the title
of the King's sons
* mt nuv elder brother
* mt ^^m^^ palace
*nstr\ 'ui throne, any
place where the King sits
* wjtlviy heart
* mt vnu to give
* wjt mTu window
* wKivimj eye
* mtwu ui^um?-!
Royal Palace
( 360 )
order command
mz iJkjjj I'^m Prapatom
to want to desire
W5:?MJ blessing
mt ■nmuM^ prayer
mt^-] a title Phya
to journey to walk
* wjsmvnti to give
money property
* w;:mi titijfuf
order command
to want, to desire
* wjnTTS^j fejii^TO to trust
second palace (Wang Na)
* wraTB QiTirLji to punish
* mtimu place enclosure
i?<5fTOi5 temple
* mt Rw cremation
WKJira priest
*v<5:q'i^'bi younger brother
W5:tnnu temple
wo father
WB m trader, merchant
n-Q Fif3 cook
s^i to escort to accompany
w'sisan to investigate
viwinw judge
w iIq^ rm relatives, brother
IN SI rocket, firework
mfi^M ceiling
silk
to be spread
two atts
common, people
policeman
(1) beyond
nm
iiWJ
(2) to pass through
nu thousand
nnvu shape, form
mxi quickly, smartly
( 361 )
k
vnu (1) vase (2) to snare
wi2^ (1) stupid (2) to
speak evil of
(3) base, common
floor, surface
imi patience
im\i friend
«M2w to miss, to mistake
■nmi whilst
m to lean against
m to ask, help of
n^s u to-morrow
mm tune
iim dear
Imi hollow, cave
i.ms until as far as
mr) company
mv] ms relatives, friends
m (1) fan (2) to blow
■nm^ to stumble
|in to speak
mm uN^u of great interest
mu to meet
mil carpet
wjQjj ready
mhii rm together
mnt because
iwjx wm therefore
JWD to stop, wait, not yet
wi sky
IvJ -fire
JNi electricity,
electric light
1m3j' conflagration
tooth
ffu "dm alternately
i^Itu deer
m to listen,to hear
y\-\i straw
^o^tocomplain, to accuse
n Tn bruise
n mattress
i^QTi to purify, to tan
v\^f\ to beat clothes
(on a stone)
( 362 )
n
L^
mile
nifen
language
1] , ^
not very
^m
mountain
V
wood, timber
njjyi
wife
mi
drunk
my Vim
in future
Mm4
diligent
my lu
inside
jjij^i
mother
my uan
outside
mv.
screen, curtain
my Mm
afterwards
liim
skilful
JJ
iimi
although
3j titty
mankind, people
M3JQU
pillow
3j:w™
cocoanut
mCiQU
like, same
}j:3Jg3
mango
aij
(1) swollen (2) rich
the day after
ijj MUiy
to pay attention to
to-morrow
ifltiJ
town, country
W3JQ
doctor
iJJBJ !J°4
up-country
M3J1
dog
jjTi
addicted to
wjji di
wolf
3Jin
much
wfi
bear
Mu;ri
hat
^V
collection
W3j;n snti panama hat
My triu
village
V\li^
all
(A
verandah blinds
uin
although
uu
mother
C^ ^^
to conceal
nii m
river
m wn
pocket knife
iif) dark
3JEIU to hand over
wjjBu to kneel before
corner
plenty
to decree
weary
wife
just now
small mattress
u
poison
y yu Japan Japanese
y ud Europe
yi in a J to fear, to respect
y iii (1) hanging down
(2) moveable(3)palanquin
Si4 to hear
dti^ pleasure
till to stand
w yet, not yet.
fji to shoot
Sj more
( 363 )
iWQ i?itn
mosquito
granary, bam
to take away by force
urn w
to steal, to snatch away
i^m (1) to turn aside
(2) uneven
yn fijiiulij
chief clerk, secretary
iin Tiu to lift up
yn l!' to raise
yin difficult
M^R drop
m (1) to hammer
(2) to hold back
viy^ to stop
v\^^ m to rest at
yoR summit, peak
wyiu coarse rough gruff
mu to pick up
lyu to sew
?i3j to borrow, to lend
you to allow
yau habitually
( 364 )
^QW 1
middling, small
mm"^
to cause, trouble
iSyjj
to visit
tim
reward, prize
^i:
long
jum^
body
o
f fjOJ
improved
J
tw unii
gambling house
ifis
large bell
IjJ V)M15
barracks
KlUHU
system
tw wtJitn?^ hospital
Ku:
section, journey
w Wn
police station
'5d5
to take care
Ijj i1y\4
school
5im
between
Ijj Jqu
"11
^
saw mill
jrlMtiTU
magnificent
mum
boots, shoe
JIRI
price
3QJ
track
^f
season
A
iJH^
story
t
to know
Jfl
to love
5^^
toknow quite well
ffifen
to guard, to care
i5
to wander about
fjyn
to call
5ir™ to trouble, to annoy
w
flavour
h
to dance
;tiiw
rickshaw
hu
shop
Jtili*!
railway
jQu jiry
to fight
o- J
jc
dollar
JTim?^ Dir
^■UM M
house, building
present government
5lm
crow's nest
Tnm^
government
( 365 )
11'
£
5Q^ m
populace
power, might
to save oneself
quickly
to receive
to partake of,
to eat
fu w^ Tiati independant
ftj 5BJ to answer for,
to guarantee
to command
nimble restless
level flat
to hurry
form, shape
picture
around
(1) altogether
(2) to include
fjiiu h\i well-arranged,
tidy
jiy
in
iliiy •]
m
m
nu
w
joy, pleasant
near, by the side of
total
at intervals
report
cruel fierce
quick
slow, dilatory
steam boat
ferry boat
man o'war
fence, hedge
theatre
in detail
to fuse
to attract
(1) wheel )2) to
jest, to banter
to say good bye
auction sale
to flow
to drive away,
to dismiss
isn to say, to explain
mi^ spirit alcoholic liquor
( 366 )
ikw
\l
an
|in yoji
an 4^s
an iijjg
iwal ufu brandy
mil iijyj beer
iW2?1 m\i wine
aiuin trouble
wm; steps
riu (1) bald (2) million
nm (1) to sail (2) to run
aai4 ^at! London
mM simply, entirely
imxi (1) sledge (2) to
move, to drag
m triy to punish iJ^^n
wa^ to miss the way,! i^^nii
to forget \mm m
via^iwa infatuated liaan
walHi roof liSn
ai^ below, beneathia^
aij to watch [sVib
?i^ uncle !
nm^ to try 1^"'^
v\n-2i (1) royal, i2) a title
m ^iim disobedient
iauj (1) to keep(2) to feed
to give a dinner
^n to steal
anynj code, appearance
a in to pull
wain to be astonished
wan (1) to get out of
the way (2) passing place
deep
key
servant
kitten
iron
world
to deceive
to choose
to cease
to lower
religious
formula, code
(1) flat (2) to
spread out
to be untied
tube, pipe,_lamp
chimney
( 367 )
m^
wire
3^1 itu
evening
vi^^ti
invisible
h
day
mi
secret
m im
birthday-
mu
asleep
:xi 3iy
trouble tumult
?)3J
wind
ITU (1) exempt (2) unless
J^13J
(1) interpreter
1- ^9^
excepted.
(2) to tie up
mu va
dizzy
Iw
to forget
1
gj •
palace
f w
low
■m
to expect
irnfiii
cape
ral'51
to hope
ihii
to enclose
)
im^i.
side, angle
2}S 1
vn^ >- to, place to deposit
i im^ii square
m^
varigated
k
vacant at leisure
iai
inferior
W
temple
im^i
to turn round
7\^ nyu
to draw pictures
Q
m^^ m%}'
to be startled
gi
wah=2 metres
1 1-
giy lii
to swim
ISIFIJ
splendid
TO
kite
iTIl
knowledge
S
cow, ox
l^n
reasoning
-;1
method
Fi
'im
disturbance quarrel
m?>
law court
lipiw
marvellous special
fp\m nm
civil court
( 368 )
mmv,mn power might
mwQ
always
m
enemy
siy^ ^^int to shudder
mu^
education
1i%iM\
Siam
i^ti
happy
mi
pond, lake
(=iQn
sawk, cubit
■uni
to let go
ir\m^
to make merit
nm
diverse
fraction, part
rich man
to eat, to enjoy
daylight, light
corpse
to store up
clean
jjfii
te be startled
'gi^•i^^1^
to swear, oath
imm
to explain, to tell
n^%s^^
able, strong, brave
Ttmn
safe, safety
mti
husband
to come, to go
sn5W>i
of all kinds
SfS
mind, attention,
■nim
harsh, cruel
Nvinu
pleasant, cheerful
colour
2tQyi
united, associated
muitili
Minister
?rtn3J w
ryl lawn, common
V
entrails
nm%i
well, healthy
LfiflRjn
rubbish, dirt
■Hmu
bridge
im
post
?rj4f
to fast
jflRflJ
important
miJyu
clerk
«fi5inj
well, healthy
srw^
book
i^m finished, completed
( 369 )
Nuviui to converse
jmjnji to promise
agreement, contract
mi short
mm. mi stone rock
lu (1) end (2) every thing
(i) Sen (2) nerve
garden
part, share
war
m-i
mv.
nii?\
srti
to doubt to mistrust
w to send
OTiriK to notice
frJ to order
mii to build
NwtiJj^ Singapore
m something, thing
|fj tall, high
?rnn?n^ woollen cloth
^uh bright
m fresh
m^ enemy
animal
faithful virtuous
finished
to insert
to enquire
m (i) to smoke 2 to pump
to eat to associate
fellow-drinker,
pot-companions
examination
suitable befitting
to succeed
according to one's wishes
riches
to decrease
(1) late (2) line
girl
beautiful
to regret the loss of
iIb tiger
im mat
iIq clothes
( 370 )
mx cowardice peevish
m^
shoal, reef
(2) to enquire
iv\f cause reason matter
Vi
m
box, chest
MB tower
W3J
to prevent
^ ear
wy
well, cured
TOT to bark
A
1 .
my my
lost
vwi. vn? way, path, journey
1
old, over ripe
mu goose
TO
to carry
wij tail
ray
oyster
m separated, distant
wk
heart
wj shop, store
W MITi
chief
h shelf
w; 15X
to laugh
uw place
vfm room
WQ 2^;j
i
#15 m kitchen
to deceive, to mislead
m^ nny iM2ri tap-room, bar
a
iAm\iCx]u cellar
Qunin^
permission
lAm ■uQ'u bed room
QU3
besides, as well
rai fli UTin reception room
aluli
Vice-minister
w^ uwu to refuse
Btan
limit
TOJ (1) obstacle (2) loop
BjQy
delicious
#1 to break
tiims
imn to force open
symptom, appearance
( 371 )
Qwuiiy week qIj
m^ aged fin
Qifij A.rab
ai^ weapon
mm^ to dwell, dwelling
m-m food
^QfiH^ gentle, not brave
^uiu device stratagem
^tjji tunnel passage
to rely upon
more
fin nstfin
noise, disturbance
att
mm V\W
diligence perseverence
steam
taniR occasion
-Q-Q m '^n^ harbour
Mrs.
power authority
district officer
danger
other
warm
soft
fat
English
IB W
QliflQ
tfui^ny
A
a fuang's worth of atts
nm continually
BTs capable daring
brick
m
supernatural power
^^ Vtuu to support
to boast
(1) scent (2) to be kind to
03J
my
oly
Big
full satisfied
to carry, to lift
pretty
shame
low fellow
gulf, bay
tumult disturbance
"tsi^a hotel, inn
ig'X@#Vg)
AD VBRTISEMENTS.
BY APPOINTMENT
KIAM HOA HENG & CO.
THE WHITELEY OF BANGKOK
EAST SIDE OF RIVER MENAM.
IMPORTERS, OF ALL KINDS :
"Wines, Spirits, Hardware and Fancy Goods
SPECIAL ATTENTION PAID TO
UP-COUNTRY ORDERS.
h Fresh Supplies of Goods m
(ti ^
M Arriving Weekly
3 G
^ We aim only to please 0)
fl Do you want anything ^*
You are sure to get the Best 53
^ at honest value at Q
^ KIAM HOA HENG'S §
^ THE UNIVERSAL PROVIDERS OF THE S
^ CITY OF THE Q
^ -WHITi: EI-EFHANT. >^
IMA I LERT
GENERAL^ STORE S- HOTEl^.
TABLE REQUISITES c^ DECORATIONS-
Carriages and Steam Launches on hire
Sole Agent for the BANGKOK MANU-
FACTURING Co's., Aerated Waters, and
the famous ' New Home ' Sewing Machine.
AH SEEANG
TAILOR.
Begs to submit the patronage of the public.
White, and other suits of first-class style, fit
and quality at moderate prices. Customers at-
tended at their residences on receipt of post-
card, giving their name and place of residence.
Almost opposite to the
BANGRAK MARKET
K. ISONAGA & CO.
Il^botograpbcrs from ])apan
nindertaS^elo execute e>>er(| ^(i\<^of cPr\olograpr\ic\iOor85.
cDeVelopii\g at\^ cPrii\tii>g of (^n>ateur s 9'legatiVes.
Studio opposite the British Legation,
NLW ROAD.
C. PAPPAYflNOPULOS
MANUFACTURER OF HIGH CLASS
EGYPTIAN CIGARETTES.
Choicest Turkish Tobacco, and the best Petchaboon
Siamese Tobacco, always fresh in stock.
New Road, Bangkok.
By Special Appointment to
H. M. THE KING OF SIAM.
fiJiilimluiJla?!
eTswuiu yi iin WW ill f miiJR mu i^au mi^ i\ v\w u
^ A d^
1 \m 1 mwQ 1 w yi ly
iiMTij yjoi Qyi^ ^ fi ^R m ^rnii5Pi
VACUUM OIL COMPANY.
OFFICZ: : BUSH l.A.NIi
The Company Stock 40 varieties of Engine and
Cylinder Oil. The best Oils are unsurpassed and
hold the premier position in the lubricating World.
Motor Oils a distinct speciality, made on scientific
principles.
The only Oil that always Oils as Oil should always Oil.
Local Manager— E. H. V. MAYNE.
KEE CHIANG & SONS
CHAREO N KRUNG ROAD, TA LAT NOI.
By Appointment Purveyors to
R.R.R. Cbc Crovcn prince of Siam.
PB.OVISIOn' WIN-E and SPIRIT
MERCHAITTS.
CHAROEN KRUNG PHOTOGRAPHIC STUDIO.
J. ANTONIO —Proprietor,
NEW ROAD, BANGKOK.
Awarded Silver Medal Hanoi Exhibition 1902-1903.
Silver Medal St. Louis Exhibition 190 Jf.
A large collection of Views and Types of Siam
Illustrated Post Cards.
Illustrated Guide Book to Bangkok and Siam.
Amateur,' s Plates developed and finished at moder-
ate charges.
A. Ml. ADAM 8. A. LEBBAY & CO.
INDIAN MERCHANTS, WHOLESALE
AND RETAIL.
Fancy Goods of all Descriptions.
Ladies and Gentlemen's Outfitters.
WAT KOH STREET, - BANGKOK.
H. SW^EE HO.
GENERAL MERCHANTS & IMPORTERS.
PROPRIETORS of the NATIONAL CHEMICAL DEPOT, Im-
porters of Drugs and Chemical Dealers in Soluble and Flavour-
ing Essences, Colourings Acid Sulphuric, and Soda Bicarbonate.
Patent Medicines, Glassware and Druggists Sundries. Suppliers of
Aerated Water Ingredients and Requisites.
Established 1871.
BANGKOK :
A-ddrces Pit Saticn Bridge, Charoen Krung Road.
^^■
^
IRON FOUNDERS
IMPORTERS AND
GENERAL CON-
TRACTORS.
f^ ^^^^ Bangkok,
SHIP ^liA ^^^ Singapore,
^ ^^^ Canton
^^ ^r^ Rangoon
LAUNCH ^^ ^^T and
BUILDERS, V^ ^ ^^
BRIDGE
BUILDERS AND
BOILER-MAKERS.
FOOK LOOIMG
SILVER MEHAL HAIVOI EAHIBri'IOX.
Contractor, Manufacturer of First Class Fur-
niture, Cabinet Maker, Boat Builder and Painter.
Furniture of every description made to order and
from any design.
A large quantity of ready made furniture
in stock.
Works and repairs executed with despatch.
Customers attended at their residences upon
receipt of a post-card.
p. W . Wijeratne & Co.
BUYERS AND SELLERS
OF
GENERAL PRODUCTS OF SIAM.
Building, (shortly to be o[)ened) opposite the
BRITISH LEGATION.
Branches at Paknampo, Km^at and Chantaboon.
S. S. MARICAN
INDIAN STORE.
SILK AND CLOTH MERCHANTS.
Wholesale and Retail Importers, Dealers in all kinds of
Indian, Chinese and Japanese Silk and Sundry Goods.
New Road, nearly opposite the French Bank, Bangkok.
2Ibe ]first ]Sail$ mcwspaper in Siam«
PUBLISHED IN ENGLISH AND SIAMESE
EVERY EVENING.
( Local - Tcs. 40 per an.
Subscription Rates -^
( Foreign £2 18s. Od. „
ENGimU EDITIOX.
Subscription Local Tcs. 20 per annum
Foreign - £1 10s. Od. „
SIAMESE WEEIiLV EDITIOIV.
Subscription Local Tcs. 15 per annum.
Moderate Advertising Rates
And Special Terms for Contracts
All kinds of printing at the
SIAM OBSERVER PRINTING WORKS
Oriental avenue— Bangkok.
"WASHII&TO]^" LI&HT AO
EiailfEEEIia CO.
W. GROSSJOHANN & CO., BANGKOK.
Sole Importers for the genuine WASHINGTON LIGHT
D. R. PATENT. Patented in almost all civilized coun-
tries. The cheapest light at the present time,
a 500 candle power lamp will use IJ atts kerosine oil
per hour.
No Engines Required, No Danger, No Trouble
Common Kerosine oil used only.
GENERAL CONTRACTORS
The above firm will undertake repairs of Automobiles,
Spare Parts, as Sparkevils, Sparkplugs, Batteries (30
amperes) also any other parts can be furnished at
cheapest rates.
Repairs of jMccbanical Instruments.
Sole Agents for : R. "WOLF, Engineering- and
Boiler Work, Magdeburg, Engle's Work, Solingen,
Pneumatic Tool Co., Dusseldorf, A. Schumann
Co., Armatur and Engine Works, Leipzic Plagurtz
U. S. F.
Representative of the
DEUTZ ET GELDERMANN.
Sec iLir MARNE CHAlVEFAGirE.
C. G. TIMONELLI'S
GENERAL PROVISION STORES.
Speciality of Provisions, Wines and Liqueurs.
New Road,
Opposite the British Legation.
m % ^ fijLuii'u?)! miy mm im jLnljtvnu m ^
iwm WW UK mm vaiv. m i iilu Vimv m^
S. TISSEPAri ^ CO.
Ottateb-mahers, jewellers. Silversmiths
and General Dealers.
REPAIRS
Established 1882,
M. CACACE'S STORE
New Road, nearly opposite
Oriental Avenue.
COMMISSION AGENTS
AND
Importers of Italian, German, English and
French Provisions.
WINE. — The largest Stock in Bangkok in
Cases and Casks, Rhine, Burgundies,
Bordeaux and Italian,
N.B.—As we deal direct with all the Manufacturers in
Europe our prices are lower than any other
Store in Siam.
INDIAN STORE
w Grssietrr)ull ©/issoarnull ^ S®.
SILK MERCHANTS & MILLINERS.
Wholesale and Retail Importers, Dealers in all kinds of
Indian, Chinese and Japanese Silk, Silverware and
Sundry Goods.
NEW ROAD, opposite the French Bank, Bangkok.
FIRMS : FOKEIG.\ BRANCHES :
Yokohama, Hongkong, Melbourne, Kobe, Canton,
j Saigon, Sourabaya, Mac-
Manila, Singapore, ' cassar,Samarang,Batavia,
Bandoeng, Padang,
Bombay and Europe. \ Penang, Rangoon, Ceylon
and Calcutta.
GOTTE & CO.
General Printing
EstablisJ)mi2nt and
BooK-biQding Department.
SEPARATE STATIONERY
DEPARTMENT.
NEW ROAD, Corner of BUSH LANE.
SEANG LOONG
CARPENTER & CONTRACTOR.
Manufacture of First Class Furniture, Cabinet
Maker, Boat-builder, and Painter. Furniture of
every description made to order from any design.
A large quantity of ready made furniture
in stock. *
Works and Repairs executed with despatch.
Customers attended at their residences upon
receipt of a post-card.
WINDMILL ROAD, NEAR BANGRAK
HOSPITAL.
BANGKOK DISPENSARY.
CHEMISTS DRUGGISTS AND OPTICIANS
PATENT MEDICINES, AND SPECTACLES
OF GOLD SILVER, AND NICKEL.
OPTICAL AND^CHIRURGICAL INSTRUMENTS
PA^EUR FILTERS.
1. S. E. AlfG-TJLLIA & CO.,
RAJAWONG ROAD-BANGKOK.
GENERAL MERCHANTS AND COMMIS-
SION AGENTS.
ROPES, COTTON, YARNS, CASTOR OIL
TRUNKS, &c., &c.
THE DRAPERY STORE
IIVDIAAI VARIETIES & JAPANESE \OVELTIES.
Silks, Cottons, Laces, Hosery, Tapestry, ' Boo/s, Shoes, Hats, Glass-
ware, Silverware, Chinaware, Ebonyisare,* Clocks, Watches,
Stationery, Greeting Cards, Bon'-bo*TS, 'fiiplls Curios
Carpets, Dados, Side-boards, FlS'wer Pots, Mattings,
Bamboo Waic, Wooden \^'are, and Rattan
Goods, &c., &e.
Building next CU9TOIVI HOUSE CANB, BSNCtJ^OK.
Telegraphic Address : "DRAPERY" A. B. C. Code, 5th Edition.
TUNG WHO & CO.,
BANGRAK.
GENBRAI. PROVISION STORi:.
Fresli Mutton on every Wednesdiiy mid Sunday
morninn- a speciality,
We beg to notify the public that we have always on hand every
description of goods — Cross and Blackwell's, ^Morton's, American,
French, and German Provisions also French. Dry .fraits sit moderate
prices.
For the Christmas Season, Fresh and. Dry Apples^ Walnuts and
Stores of every description. A post-card s.fent, "will be attended to
immediately.
ORIENTAL BAKERY
(ORIENTAL AVENUE).
Have always on hand f^jBsh Biscuits
and Rusk£^
Daily supply of White Bread and Rolls.
Brown Bread every Wednesday
and Sunday.
Fresh Cakes made every other day.
Wiener Bread on Sunday only.
Other Cakes, Puddings, Tarts, Jellies and
Ice-creams. Supplied to order.
ALL ORDERS PROMPTLY ATTENDED TO.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11